TM 55-1905-217-12

TECHNICAL MANUAL

OPERATOR AND OROANIZATIONAL

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LANDING CRAFT, MECHANI7F,D;

STEEL; DED; OVERAIT, LENGTH 74FEET;

MOD 1, MARK VIII, NAVY DESIGN LCM-8

HULL NUMBERS 8500 THRU 8560 AND 8580 THRU 8618

(GUNDERSON BROS. ENGINEERING CORP.,

MARINETTE MARINE CORP., AND ROHR CORP.)

FSN 1905-935.6057

This copy is a reprint which includes current

pages from Changes 1 through 3.

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

AUGUST 1974
WARNING

DANGEROUS CHEMICALS

are used in this equipment.

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

may result if personnel fail to observe these safety

precautions.

Avoid contact with the battery electrolyte.

If the solution comes in contact with the skin, rinse

the area immediately with clear water to avoid skin

burns.

Be sure all cargo is secure, especially during rough seas.

WARNING

FIRE OR EXPLOSION HAZARD

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

may result if personnel fail to observe these safety

precautions.

Hatches must be open before energizing

any electrical circuits or starting

engines.

Do not smoke or use an open flame in the vicinity

when servicing batteries as hydrogen gas, an explosive

is generated. Use only distilled water to maintain

battery electrolyte level.

Do not fill fuel tank while engine is running.

Provide me’allic contact between the fuel container

and fuel tank to prevent a static spark from

igniting fuel.

Wipe or flush any spillage.

Volatile materials will not be brought aboard;

electrical circuits will not be energized;

fuel tanks will not be topped off;

and engines will not he started

before C02 fire fighting

equipment is available

and operative.

Observe NO SMTOKING rules when refueling.

Do not work on live circuits. Tag circuit and warn

other personnel not an energize the circuit.

Never use a b)low torch or other similar means for

heating fuel or oil lines.

WARNING

ASPHYXIATION DANGER

Be sure engine room ventilators are open when

operating the engine (s).

The engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,

which is a colorless, odorless, and poisonous gas.
TM 55-1905-217-12

C7

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS

DFPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

NO. 7 WASHINGTON, D.C., 4 April 1994

Operator and Organizational

Maintenance Manual

LANDING CRAFT, MECHZED;

STEEL; DED; OVERALL LENTh7FI-FEET;

MOD 1, MARK VIII, NAVY DES GN LCM-8

HULL NUMBERS 8500 THRU 8560 AN :m:8o THRU 8618

(GUNDERSON BROS. ENGINEERING CORP.,

MARINETTE MARINE CORP., AND ROHR CORP.)

FSN 1905-935-6057

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited

TM 55-1905-217-12, 15 August 1974, is changed as follows:

1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or chanS text material is indicated by a vertical bar

in the margin. An illustration change is indicated by a m'i/i§ pointing hand.

Remove pages Insert Pages

B-1 through B-6 B-1 through B-8

C-21 and C-22 C-21 and C-22

2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

GORDON R. SULUVAN

General, United States Army

Official: Chief of Staff

MILON H. HAMILTON

Administrative Assistant to the

Secretary of the Army

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25- k no.1051 requirement for

TM 55-1905-217-12.
TM 55-1905-217-12

C6

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

NO. 6 WASHINGTON, D.C., 18 MAY 1992

Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual

LANDING CRAFT, MECHANIZED, STEEL, DED, OVERALL LENGTH 74-FEET,

MOD 1, MARK VIII, NAVY DESIGN LCM-8

HULL NUMBERS 8500 THRU 8560 AND 8580 THRU 8618

(GUNDERSON BROS. ENGINEERING CORP.,

MARINETTE MARINE CORP., AND RORH CORP.)

FSN 1905-935-6057

Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited

TM 55 -1905-217-12, 5 August 1974, is changed as follows:

1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical bar in the 

margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.

Remove pages Insert pages

C-21 and C-22 C-21 and C-22

2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

GORDON R. SULLIVAN

General, United States Army

Official: Chief of Staff

MILTON H. HAMILTON

Administrative Assistant to the

Secretary of the Army

on

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25E, qty rqr block no. 1051.

05
TM 55-1905-217-12

C 5

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

No. 5 WASHINGTON, D.C., 17 June 1988

Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual

LANDING CRAFT, MECHANIZED; STEEL; DED; OVERALL LENGTH 74-FEET;

MOD 1, MARK VIII, NAVY DESIGN LCM-8

HULL NUMBERS 8500 THRU 8560 AND 8580 THRU 8618

(GUNDERSON BROS. ENGINEERING CORP.,

MARINETTE MARINE CORP., AND ROHR CORP.)

FSN 1905-935-6057

TM 55-1905-217-12, 15 August 1974, is changed as follows:

1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical bar in the

margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.

Remove pages Insert pages

1-1 and 1-2 1-1 and 1-2

A-1 A-l/A-2

B-3 and B-4 B-3 and B-4

2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

CARL E. VUONO

General, United States Army

Chief of Staff

Offical:

R. L. DILWORTH

Brigadier General, United States Army

The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25A, Operator and Unit Maintenance requirements for Landing

Craft, Mechanized, Steel Design LCM-8, Model 1, Mark VII, 74 Ft.

07

}
TM 55-1905-217-12

C4

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

NO. 4 WASHINGTON, D.C., 29 January 1987

Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual

LANDING CRAFT, MECHANIZED;

STEEL; DED; OVERALL LENGTH 74-FEET;

MOD 1, MARK VIII, NAVY DESIGN LCM-8

HULL NUMBERS 8500 THRU 8560 AND 8580 THRU 8618

(GUNDERSON BROS, ENGINEERING CORP.,

MARINETTE MARINE CORP., AND ROHR CORP.)

FSN 1905-935-6057

TM 55-1905-217-12, 15 August 1974, is changed as follows:

1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical bar in the

margin. An illustration change is indicated by a miniature pointing hand.

Remove pages Insert pages

B-5 and B-6 B-5 and B-6

2. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

JOHN A. WICKHAM, JR.

General, United States Army

Official: Chief of Staff

R. L. DILWORTH

Brigadier General, United States Army

The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25A, Operator and Organizational Maintenance requirements for

Landing Craft, Mechanized, Steel Design LCM-8, Model 1, Mark VII, 74 Ft
URGENT

TM 55-1905-217-12

C3

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

NO. 3 WASHINGTON, D.C., 28 June 1984

Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual

LANDING CRAFT, MECHANIZED;

STEEL; DED; OVERALL LENGTH 74-FEET;

MOD 1, MARK VIII, NAVY DESIGN LCM-8

HULL NUMBERS 8500 THRU 8560 AND 8580 THRU 8618

(GUNDERSON BROS, ENGINEERING CORP.,

MARINETTE MARINE CORP., AND ROHR CORP.)

FSN 1905-935-6057

TM 55-1905-217-12, 15 August 1974, is changed as follows:

1. Warning page is superseded as follows:

2. Remove and insert pages as indicated below. New or changed text material

is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin. An illustration change is indicated

by a miniature pointing hand.

Remove pages Insert pages

a and b

3. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

JOHN A. WICKHAM, JR.

General, United States Army

Official: Chief of Staff

ROBERT M. JOYCE

Major General, United States Army

The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-250, Operator Maintenance requirements for Marine Equipment,

All.

URGENT

11

}
TM 55-1905-217-12

C2

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

No. 2 WASHINGTON, D.C., 23 August 1982

Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual

LANDING CRAFT, MECHANIZED;

STEEL; DED; OVERALL LENGTH 74 FEET;

MOD 1, MARK VIII, NAVY DESIGN LCM-8

HULL NUMBERS 8500 THRU 8560 AND 8580 THRU 8618

(GUNDERSON BROS. ENGINEERING CORP.,

MARINETTE MARINE CORP., AND ROHR CORP.)

NSN 1905-00-935-6057

TM 55-1905-217-12, 15 August 1974, is changed as follows:

1. Remove and insert pages as indicated below.

Remove pages Insert pages

Chapter 3 3-5 and 3-6 3-5 thru 3-6.6

3-7 and 3-8 3-7 and 3-8

2. New or changed text material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin.. An illustration change is indicated by a

miniature pointing hand.

3. Retain this sheet in front of manual for reference purposes.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

E. C. MEYER

General, United States Army

Official: Chief of Staff

ROBERT M. JOYCE

Brigadier General, United State Army

The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25D, Operator maintenance requirements for Marine Equipment,

All.

13
TM 55-1906-217-12

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

NO. 1 WASHINGTON, DC, 10 April 1979

Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual

LANDING CRAFT, MECHANIZED;

STEEL; DED; OVERALL LENGTH 74 FEET;

MOD 1, MARK VIII, NAVY DESIGN LCM-8

HULL NUMBERS 8500 THRU 8560 AND 8580 THRU 8618

(GUNDERSON BROS. ENGINEERING CORP.,

MARINETTE MARINE CORP., AND ROHR CORP. )

NSN 1905-00-935-6057

TM 55-1905-217-12, 15 August 1974, is changed as follows:

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in

the margin of the page. Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification number.

Remove Pages Insert Pages

1-1 and 1-2 1-1 and 1-2

 2-1 thru 2-4 2-1 thru 2-4

2-13 and 2-14 2-13, 2-14, and 2-14.1

2-37 2-37

4-79 and 4-80 4-79 and 4-80

A-1 A-1

B-1 thru B-6 B-1 thru B-6

2. File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

BERNARD W. ROGERS

General, United States Army

Official: Chief of Staff

J. C. PENNINGTON

Major General, United States Army

The Adjutant General

Distribution:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25D, Operator maintenance requirements for Marine Equipment, All.

15

}
TM 5-1905-217-12

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

may result if personnel fail to observe these safety

precautions.

Avoid contact with the battery electrolyte.

If the solution comes in contact with the skin, rinse

the area immediately with clear water to avoid skin

burns.

Acids can cause serious burns or blindness. Avoid contact with eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not breathe vapors. Wear

rubber gloves, goggles, and a rubber apron when handling them. When diluting acids, do not add water to acid; the acid

must be added to the mixture slowly and with constant mixing. In case of contact with acid, flush the affected area with

plenty of water and obtain medical aid immediately.

Before working on any electrical equipment, make sure the circuits has been deenergized and the cables have been

disconnected from the battery.

When cutting with a torch, or when welding, always station fire watches, ready with fire extinguishers, in the vicinity on both

sides of the plate that is being cut or welded.

Ramp hinge pins must be replaces one at a time, allowing three remaining pins to support ramp. Removal of two or more

hinge pins may result in the weight of the ramp misaligning the remaining hinges, resulting

in damage to ramp and possible injury or death to maintenance personnel.

When refueling, shut down the electrical system of the LARC. Observe the no smoking rule. Do not permit anyone to

operate tools or equipment which may produce sparks near the refueling operation. Sparks or fire may ignite the diesel

fuel and produce an explosion.

Before attempting to remove any compressed air system lines or components, relieve air pressure from system. Failure to

do so may result in injury or possible death to maintenance personnel.

Before disconnecting a line in the hydraulic system, bleed the pressure from that portion of the line. Failure to do so may

result in injury or possible death to maintenance personnel.

Be sure all cargo is secure, especially during rough seas.

WARNING

FIRE OR EXPLOSION HAZARD

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

may result if personnel fail to observe these safety

precautions.

Hatches must be open before energizing any electrical circuits or starting engines. Do not smoke or use an open flame in

the vicinity when servicing batteries as hydrogen gas, an explosive is generated. Use distilled water to maintain battery

electrolyte level. Do not fill fuel tank while engine is running. Provide metallic contact between the fuel tank to prevent a

static spark from igniting fuel.

Fuel oil and other petroleum products are highly volatile in extreme heat. To minimize the possibility of explosion, wipe up

all spills at once, see that fuel lines and valves are not leaking and pump bilges regularly.

Change 3 a
TM 55-1905-217-12

Volatile materials will not be brought aboard; electrical circuits will not be energized: fuel tanks will not be topped off; and

engines will not be started before C02 fire fighting equipment is available and operative.

Observe NO SMOKING rules when refueling. Do not work on live circuits. Tag circuit and warn other personnel not to

energize the circuit. Never use a blow torch or other similar means for heating fuel or oil lines.

Prior to cutting or welding on the ramp, remove drain plugs on both sides of the ramp and check if ramp interior is primer

coated. If primer coated, flush thoroughly with steam, carbon dioxide, or water. Do not reinstall drain plugs until the

cutting and/or welding operation is completed. Failure to take this precaution may result in explosion of accumulated

primer vapors.

WARNING

ASPHYXIATION DANGER

Be sure engine room ventilators are open when operating the engine(s). The engine exhaust gases contain carbon

monoxide, which is a colorless, odorless, and poisonous gas.

When working inside the hydraulic oil supply tank, a portable-type circulating blower should be used to prevent vapor

accumulation. For extended work periods inside the tank, an air line tube respirator should be worn. Station an observer

outside tank in case worker is overcome by fumes.

Change 3 b
TM 55-1905-217-12

TECHNICAL MANUAL HEADQUARTERS,

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

No. 556-1917-12 WASHINGTON, D. C., 15 August 1974

OPERATOR AND ORGAIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANLUAL

LANDING CRAFT, MECHANIZED; STEEL; DED; OVERALL

LENGTH 74-fEET; MOD I, MARK VII, NAVY OESIGN LCM-8

HULL NUMBERS 8500 THRU 8560 AND 8580 THRU 8618

(GUNDERSON BROS. ENGINEERING CORP.,

MARINETTE MARINE CORP., AND ROHR CORP.)

FSN 190’ 9356057

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION

Section I. General........................................................................................................1-1 1-1

Description and Data...................................................................................1-7 1-1

Chapter 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Operating Procedure...................................................................................2-1 2-1

 II. Operation of Auxiliary Equipment ...............................................................2-7 2-35

 III. Operation Under Unusual Condition ...........................................................2-11 2-36

Chapter 3 OPERATOR/CREW MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Lubrication Instruction 3-1 3-1

 II. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Service.............................................3-3 3-6

 III. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................3-5 3-7

 IV. Maintenance procedure...............................................................................3-7 3-10

 V. Field Expedient Repairs _ ...........................................................................3-22 3-18

Chapter 4 ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION8

Section I. Service upon Receipt of Material ................................................................4-1 4-1

 II. Movement to a New Worksite ....................................................................4-4 4-1

 III. Repair Parts, Special tool’s and Equipment................................................4-6 4-4

 IV. Lubrication Instructions ...............................................................................4-9 4-6

 V. Preventive Maintenance Checks end Services...........................................4-11 4-7

 VI. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................4-13 4-8

 VII. Radio Interference Suppression..................................................................4-15 4-13

 VIII. Engines .......................................................................................................4-19 4-13

 IX. Engine Lubricating System..........................................................................4-23 4-17

 X. Engine Fuel System ...................................................................................4-26 4-18

 XI. Engine Exhaust System ..............................................................................4-39 4-36

 XII. Engine Cooling System...............................................................................4-41 4-38

 XIII. Electrical System Instruments end Gages ..................................................4-47 4-43

 XIV. Hydraulic Starting System...........................................................................4-57 4-54

 XV. Transmission...............................................................................................4-68 4-60

 XVI. Power Transfer Assembly ...........................................................................4-73 4-65

 XVII. Hydraulic Steering System .........................................................................4-75 4-65

 XVIII. Power takeoff ..............................................................................................4-83 4-72

 XIX. Hydraulic Ramp Hoist..................................................................................4-85 4-74

 XX. Bilge Pump System.....................................................................................4-100 4-81

 XXI. Hull 4-104.................................................................................................... 4-86

Chapter 5 MATERIAL USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MTAJOR ITEMS

Section I. Fire Fighting Equipment ..............................................................................5-1 5-1

 II. Communication and Navigational Equipment ............................................5-3 5-1

Appendix A REFERENCES............................................................................................ A-1

 B BOAT SET LIST.......................................................................................... B-1

 C MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART..................................................... C-1

INDEX .................................................................................................................... ......................... I-1

i

}
TM 5-1905-217-12

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Number Page

1-1 Landing craft, mechanized, diesel, design, LCM-8, MOD 1 (IMarinet’s and Gunderson Models) ... 1-2

1-2 Landing craft, mechanized, diesel, design LOM-8 MOD 1 (,Rohr Model).......................................... 1-3

1-3 Plan view wiring diagram, hull numbers LCM 8500 thru 8518 (IMarinette Marine)............................ 1-4

1-4 Plan view wiring diagram, hull numbers LCM 8520 thru 8539 (Gunderson Brothers) -..................... 1-6

1-5 Electrical system schematic, hull numbers LCM 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (Rohr

Corporation......................................................................................................................................... 1-8

1-4 Hydraulic starting system diagram, hull numbers LCM 8500 thru 8519 (Marinette Marine).............. 1-14

1-7 Hydraulic starting system diagram, hull number LCM 8520 thru 8539 (Gunderson Brothers)........... 1-16

1-8 Hydraulic starting system functioning diagram, hull numbers LCM 8540 thru8560 and 8580 thru

8618 (Rohr Corporation) .................................................................................................................... 1-16

1-9 Hydraulic steering system diagram, hull numbers LCM 8500 thru 85S19 (Marinette, Marine) ......... 1-17

1-10 Hydraulic steering system diagram, hull numbers LCM 8520 thru 8539 (Gunderson Brothers) ....... 1-18

1-11 Hydraulic steering system functional diagram, hull numbers LCM 8540 thru 8560 and LCM

8580 thru 8618 (Rohr Corporation) .................................................................................................... 1-20

1-12 Ramp hoist hydraulic system diagram, hull numbers LOM 8500 thru 9519 (Marinette Marine) ....... 1-22

1-13 Ramp hoist hydraulic system diagram, hull numbers LCM 8620 thru 8539 (Gunderson Brothers) .. 1-23

1-14.1 Ramp hoist system hydraulic functional diagram (Sheet ’1 of 2) ....................................................... 1-24

1-14.2 Ramp hoist system hydraulic functional diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)........................................................ 1-25

1-15.1 Bilge drainage system functional diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)................................................................... 1-26

1-15.2 Bilge drainage system functional diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)................................................................... 1-27

1-16 Engine fresh water system functional diagram ................................................................................. 1-28

1-17 Engine raw sea water system functional diagram.............................................................................. 1-29

2-2 Engine fuel system functional diagram .............................................................................................. 1-30

1-18 Pilot house controls and instruments, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 2-2-

2-1 Pilot house controls and instruments, hull numbers 8620 thru 8539 ................................................. 2-3

2-3 Pilot house controls and instruments, hull numbers 8’540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 ................ 2-4

2-4 ’Distribution panel............................................................................................................................... 2-5

2-5 Distribution panel ............................................................................................................................... 2-6

2-6.1 Engine controls in engine room (Sheet 1 of 2) .................................................................................. 2-8

2-6.2 Engine controls in engine room (Sheet 2 of’2) .................................................................................. 2-9

2-7.1 Engine room controls and indicators, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.................. 2-10

2-7.2 Engine room controls and indicators, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8818.................. 2-11

2-8.1 Propulsion unit controls diagram, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 818.......................... 2-12

2-8.2 Propulsion unit controls diagram, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618........................ 2-13

2-9 Engine electric start button in engine room........................................................................................ 2-13

2-10 Hydraulic starting control valves in engine room ............................................................................... 2-14

2-11 Hydraulic starting system solenoid control valve, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and

8580 thru 8618 .................................................................................................................................. 2-15

2-12 Fuel system valves............................................................................................................................. 2-16

2-13 Sea water discharge valve ................................................................................................................. 2-16

2-14 Bilge pumps, lines and valves............................................................................................................ 2-17

2-15 Bilge overboard discharge valves ...................................................................................................... 2-18

2-16 Steering system and ramp hoist system suction valves, hull numbers 8500 thru 8&19 .................... 2-18

2-17 Hydraulic starting system tank and valves, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 ......................................... 2-18

2-18 Hydraulic starting system reservoir, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 land 8580 thru 8618 ................... 2-19

2-19 Hydraulic starting system accumulator and valve ............................................................................. 2-20

2-20 Hydraulic starting system accumulator and valve, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and

8580 thru 8618 .................................................................................................................................. 2-21

2-21 Hydraulic starting system hand pump ................................................................................................ 2-22

2-22 Hydraulic starting system hand pump, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 ............... 2-23

2-23 Steering system valves, pump discharge, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 .......................................... 2-24

2-24 Steering system valves, cylinders, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 ...................................................... 2-24

2-25 Clutch lever and ramp hoist pump ..................................................................................................... 2-25

2-26.1 Emergency winch controls (Sheet 1 of 2)........................................................................................... 2-25

ii
TM 55-1905-217-12

number Title Page

2-26.2 Emergency winch controls (Sheet 1 of 2).............................................................................. 2-26

2-27 Steering system expansion tank with sight glass, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519.................. 2-27

2-28 Cooling system expansion tank............................................................................................. 2-27

2-29 Ramp hoist hydraulic system filters....................................................................................... 2-27

2-30 Steering system filter ............................................................................................................ 2-27

2-31 Engine starting instructions, hull numbers 8500 thru 8l 19 and 8520 thru 86S9................... 2-28

2-32 Engine starting instructions, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8118................... 2-29

2-33 Engine stopping instructions, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 8S20 thru 8659................. 2-30

2-34 Engine stopping instructions, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8S118............... 2-31

2-35 Landing craft operational procedures, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 8520 thru 85839.. 2-32

2-36 Landing craft operational procedures, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 ... 2-33

2-37 Emergency tiller..................................................................................................................... 2-34

2-38 Ramp hoist hydraulic system suction strainer, hull numbers 8500 thru 8619....................... 2-34

2-39 Ramp load binders and chain hoist....................................................................................... 2-34

2-40 Starting aid ............................................................................................................................ 2-36

3-1 Engine and transmission oil filters......................................................................................... 3-2

3-2 Engine and transmission oil filter servicing ........................................................................... 3-3

3-3 Transmission oil strainer ....................................................................................................... 3-4

3-4 Transmission oil strainer servicing ........................................................................................ 3-5

3-5 Primary fuel line strainers, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 ..................................................... 3-11

3-6 Primary fuel line strainers, hull numbers 8840 8560 and 8580 thru 8618............................. 3-12

3-7 Engine ’mounted fuel strainers and fuel filters ...................................................................... 3-13

3-8 Adjusting alternator belts....................................................................................................... 3-13

3-9 Location of fuses ................................................................................................................... 3-13

3-10 Battery service ...................................................................................................................... 3-14

3-11 Adjusting bilge pump belt ...................................................................................................... 3-15

3-12 Bilge pump installation .......................................................................................................... 3-15

3-13 Sea water strainers .............................................................................................................. 3-16

3-14 Stuffing box adjustment, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 85620 thru 8539 ..................... 3-16

3-15 Stuffing box installation, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 3 ...................... 3-17

3-16 Propeller and propeller shaft ................................................................................................. 3-18

4-1 Lazarette equipment stowage, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8818............... 4-2

4-2 Ramp cable sheave details, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 _................ 4-7

4-3 Interference suppression components .................................................................................. 4-13

4-4 Inboard view of port propulsion unit ..................................................................................... 4-14

4-5 Outboard view of port propulsion unit ................................................................................... 4-15

4-6 Engine arrangement ............................................................................................................. 4-16

4-7 Crankshaft Rotation and accessory arrangement at viewed from flywheel end ................... 4-16

4-8 Checking compression pressure........................................................................................... 4-17

4-9 Valve clearance adjustment .................................................................................................. 4-17

4-10 Exhaust manifold................................................................................................................... 4-17

4-11 Engine oil cooler.................................................................................................................... 4-18

4-12 Fuel system diagram............................................................................................................. 4-19

4-13 Fuel injector mounting........................................................................................................... 4-20

4-14 Removing injector from cylinder head................................................................................... 4-21

4-15 Figure not used.

4-16 Timing fuel injector ................................................................................................................ 4-21

4-17 Fuel pump ............................................................................................................................. 4-22

4-18 Removing the governor ........................................................................................................ 4-23

4-19 Removing the governor, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618......................... 4-24

4-20 Governor components........................................................................................................... 4-25

4-21 Adjusting Gap........................................................................................................................ 4-26

4-22 Positioning No.1injector rack control lever............................................................................ 4-27

4-23 Checking rotating movement of injector control rack ........................................................... 4-27

4-24 Checking injector control rack '"spring”................................................................................. 4-27

4-25 Adjusting maximum no-load speed ....................................................................................... 4-28

4-26 Adjusting engine idle speed ................................................................................................. 4-29

4-27 Throttle control adjustment diagram ..................................................................................... 4-30

4-28 Pilot house engine control, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618..................... 4-33

4-29 Pilot house engine control system, .hull number 8500 thru 815d9........................................ 4-34

iii
TM 55-1905-217-12

number Title Page

4-30 Pilot house engine control, hull numbers 8520 thru 8539..................................................... 4-34

4-31 Engine controls quick disconnects, hull numbers 8520 thru 8539 ........................................ 4-34

4-32 Blower air inlet silencer assembly ......................................................................................... 4-35

4-33 Exhaust system..................................................................................................................... 4-37

4-34 Engine exhaust system, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 86580 thru 8618 ...................... 4-38

4-35 Fresh water cooling systems ................................................................................................ 4-39

4-36 Raw (sea) water cooling systems.......................................................................................... 4-41

4-37 Engine water manifold removal............................................................................................. 4-42

4-38 Thermostat and thermostat housing removal ....................................................................... 4-42

4-39 Fresh water pump mounting ................................................................................................. 4-43

4-40 Raw (sea) water pump mountings ........................................................................................ 4-43

4-41.1 Alternator testing ................................................................................................................... 4-44

4-41.2 Alternator testing ................................................................................................................... 4-45

4-41.3 Alternator testing ................................................................................................................... 4-46

4-41.4 Alternator testing ................................................................................................................... 4-46

4-41.5 Alternator testing ................................................................................................................... 4-47

4-41.6 Alternator testing ................................................................................................................... 4-48

4-41.7 Alternator testing ................................................................................................................... 4-49

4-41.8 Alternator testing ................................................................................................................... 4-50

4-42 Alternator cover, removal ..................................................................................................... 4-51

4-43 Alternator, removal................................................................................................................ 4-51

4-44 Electric starter and solenoid switch....................................................................................... 4-52

4-45 Instruments and gages.......................................................................................................... 4-53

4-46 Tachometer drive .................................................................................................................. 4-53

4-47 Tachometer drive, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 .................................. 4-53

4-48 Rudder angle indicator installation, hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 ........ 4-54

4-49 Hydraulic starting system pump ............................................................................................ 4-55

4-50 Hydraulic starting system reservoirs ..................................................................................... 4-56

4-51 Filter hydraulic starting system.............................................................................................. 4-56

4-52 Accumulator, gage and valve................................................................................................ 4-56

4-53 Hydraulic starting motor removal........................................................................................... 4-59

4-54 Hydraulic starting solenoid valve, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519........................................... 4-59

4-55 Hydraulic starting control valve, hull numbers 8520 thru 8539.............................................. 4-59

4-56 Torqmatic marine gear .......................................................................................................... 4-62

4-57 Transmission oil pump removal ............................................................................................ 4-63

4-58 Transmission control valve.................................................................................................... 4-63

4-59 Transmission oil cooler removal............................................................................................ 4-64

4-60 Transmission oil cooler details ............................................................................................. 4-64

4-61 Power transfer assembly....................................................................................................... 4-66

4-62 Steering and ramp hoist hydraulic system tanks................................................................... 4-68

4-63 Hydraulic steering pump........................................................................................................ 4-68

4-64 Steering cylinder removal...................................................................................................... 4-69

4-65 Steering cylinder, sectional view ........................................................................................... 4-70

4-66 Rudder stops installation, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618....................... 4-71

4-67 Relief valve adjustment steering system, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519............................... 4-71

4-68 Double over-center valves steering system, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 .......................... 4-71

4-69 Relief valve, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618............................................ 4-71

4-70 Counterbalance valves, steering system, hull number 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 819 .. 4-71

4-71 Helm unit removal ................................................................................................................. 4-72

4-72 Power take-off ....................................................................................................................... 4-72

4-73 Power takeoff assembly, sectional view................................................................................ 4-73

4-74 Ramp hoist hydraulic pump................................................................................................... 4-76

4-75 Ramp hoist control valve linkage installation, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618 .............................................................................................................................. 4-76

4-78 Ramp hoist control valve....................................................................................................... 4-77

4-77 Ramp winch, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 .......................................................................... 4-77

4-78 Ramp winch, hull numbers 8520 thru 8539........................................................................... 4-77

4-79 Ramp hoist system relief valve, hull numbers 8’500 thru 86118........................................... 4-77

4-80 Counterbalance valve, -ramp hoist system, hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618 ............................................................................................................................... 4-78

iv
TM 55-1905-217-12

number Title Page

4-81 Ramp locking cylinder, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618........................... 4-80

4-82 Winch automatic reversing mechanism, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618 ...................................................................................................................................... 4-81

4-83 Bilge pump removal............................................................................................................... 4-82

4-84 Bilge pump, exploded view, hull numbers 8640 h 8560 and 8580 thru 8618...................... 4-84

4-85 Bilge system foot valve, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.......................... 4-86

5-1 Communications equipment (AN/VRC-46 and AN/SRC-3), hull number 8640 thru

8560 and 8580 thru 8618 ..................................................................................................... 5-2

5-2 Communications Equipment (AN/VRC-47 and AN/GRC-106), hull numbers 8540

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 .............................................................................................. 5-3

v
TM 55-1905-217-12

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTON

SECTION I. GENERAL

1-1. Scope

This manual is for your use in operating and maintaining

the landing craft, design LCM-8, MOD 1. The manual

provides information on the operation, lubrication, and

organizational maintenance of the equipment. Also

included are descriptions of main units and their

functions in relationship to other components.

1-2. Maintenance forms and Records

Maintenance forms and records that you are required to

use are explained in DA Pam 738-750.

1-3. Reporting of Errors

You can improve this manual by calling attention to

errors and by recommending improvements, using DA

Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications), or

by a letter, and mail direct to

the Commander, U.S Army Troop Support Command,

ATTN: AMSTR-MCTS, 4300 Goodfellow Blvd., St.

Louis, MO 63120-1798. A Reply will be furnished directly

to you.

1-4. Equipment Serviceability Criteria (ESC)

This. equipment is not covered by an ESC.

1-5. Destruction of Army Material to Prevent Enemy

Use .

Procedures to be followed when capture or

abandonment of the landing craft to an enemy is eminent

are covered in TM 750-244-3.

1-6. Administrative -Storage

Procedures to be followed will be found in T’M 740-90-1

Administrative Storage.

SECTION II. Description and Data

1-7. Description

a. General. The LCM-8, MOD 1, Landing Craft

 (fig. 1-1 and 1-2) is a welded steel, twinscrew type craft. It is

used to transport cargo, troops, and vehicles from ship

shore, shore-to shore, or in retrograde movements. It

may be utilized for lighterage and utility work in harbors.

It is intended for use in rough or exposed waters and is

capable of operating through breakers and grounding on

a beach, remaining upright and tight, and retracting from

the beach under its own power. The craft is propelled by

two twin-engine propulsion units, and is capable of a

speed of nine knots when fully equipped. The

maintenance paragraphs of this manual contain detailed

descriptions of the components of the LCM’s.

b. Main Deck. The main deck is aft, with the pilot

house centrally located on the deck. The engine room

hatch is located in the deck

from the pilot house and the Lazarette hatch is located

in the deck aft from the pilot house. The deck contains a

bolted cover plate over each-engine to facilitate engine

removal and installation.

c. Cargo Well and Ramp. The cargo well is

forward. Dimensions are 42 ft. long and 15 ft. wide.

The ramp is lowered and raised, by a winch located

forward in the hull. The winch is powered by a hydraulic

motor and is normally controlled from the pilot house.

d. Engine Room. The engine room is below the main

deck between the cargo well and the Lazarette.

Hydraulic system tanks are located in the engine room.

Craft manufactured by the Marinette Marine Corporation

also have a steering system expansion tank in the pilot

house. Bilge pumps and bilge system. valves are

located in the engine room.

e. Lazarette. The lazaette is aft below. the main deck.

It contains the two diesel fuel tanks,

Change 5 1-1
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-1. Landing craft, mechanized, diesel, design, LCM-8, MOD-1. ( Marinette and Gunderson Models)

fuel shutoff and steering cylinders, steering linkage, and

ball valves and counterbalance valves. Space for

ammunition stowage is provided in the Lazarette

f. Starting and Control Systems. Two starting

systems are provided for the diesel engines. Each

outboard engine has an electric starter and each inboard

engine has a hydraulic starter. If either stating system

should fail, the other systems can be used to start both

engines. Separate hydraulic systems can be used to

start both engines. Separate hydraulic systems are

provided for steering and for the ramp hoist.

g. Pilot House. The pilot house on the Marionette

and Gunderson Models are of the same type

construction. The pilot house on the Rohr Model is

somewhat different in that it has an overhead.

1-8. Difference in Models

a. General. Landing craft, LCM-8, MOD 1, have

been produced by three different manufacturers as

follows:

Maufacturer Registry Numbers

Marinette Marine Corp. LCM-8500 thru LCM-8519

Gunderson Bros Engineering Corp. LCM-8450 thru LCM-8539

Rohr Corporation LCM-8540 thru LCM-8560

and LCM-8580 thru

LCM8a18

b. Components. The propulsion engine units and

many other components are common to all craft. There

are some differences in the ramp hoist system and the

steering system. Refer to paragraph 1-9c for a list of

major accessories used in these craft.

c. Operation. Controls and operation are generally

the same for all craft. Minor differences are explained in

paragraphs 2-1 thru 2-6.

d. Maintenance. Differences in maintenance

procedures may be required where different accessories

have been used. Maintenance procedures for all

accessories are provided and identified in appropriate

sections in this manual.

e. Schematic and Functional Diagrams. Plan views

and functional diagrams of the systems are shown in

figures 13 through 1-18.

1-2
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-2. Landing craft, mechanized, diesel, design, LCM-8, MOD I (Rohr Model).

1-9. Tabulated Data

a. Major Identification Plates.

(1) Landing Craft identification plate. Located in

the engine room, specifies the nomenclature, registry number, manufacturer, and Buships plan

number.

(2) Engine identification plate. Located on the

engine rocker arm cover, includes the model number,

unit number, rated H.P., continuous

1-3
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-3. Plan view wiring diagram, hull numbers LCM 8500 thru 8519 (Marinette Marine

1-4
TM 55-1905-217-12

1.Receptacle 11. Fan 19.Rudder angle indicator 28.Fuel pressure switch

2 Stern Light 12 Binnacle light and XMTR 29 Starter motor

3 Port aide light (red) receptacle 20.White light 30 Rudder angle indicator

4. Radio receptacle 13.Horn 21Toggle switch 31.Water temperature

5. Horn button 14. Standard side light 22.Reeptade witch (close at 2060

6. control and (green) 23. Port alternator -ammeter F)

distribution panel 15.Masthead light 24. Starboard alternator 32 Resistor

7. Cargo well light switch 16"Not under command" ammeter 33 Regulator

8. Battery charge ammeter light 25 .Battery 34 Alternator

9. Cargo well light (red) 17. Mast light cable 26. Anchor light 35 Magnetic switch (starter

10. Engine alarm panel 18. Plug 27 Oil pressure switch contractor)

Figure 1-3- Continued

1-5
TM 5-1905-217-12

Figure 1-4. Plan view wiring diagram, hull numbers LCM- 8539 (Gunderson Brothers)

1-6
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Receptacle 10. Light panel 20. White light 31 Temperature switch

2 Stern light 11. Cargo well light 21. White lights toggle (closes at 205* F)

3 Port side light (red) switch Retort 32 Resistor

4. Radio receptacle 12 Binnacle light and 22 Receptacle 33 Regulator(alternative)

5 Water tight enclosure receptacle 23. Rudder angle indicator 34. Alternator

6. Control and distribution 13. Horn power supply 35. Cargo well light (red)

panel 14. Starboard side light 24. Rain tight enclosure 36 Fan

7. Rotary snap switch, (green) 25. Battery 37. Anchor light

navigational lights 15 Masthead light 26. Push-button start switch 38. Rudder angle in

8 Toggle switch, navig 16. "Not under command 27 Fuel pressure switch 27. Fuel pressure switch

tional lights light 28. Oil pressure switch

9. Rotary snap switch 17. Mast light cable 29. Starting motor

binnacle instrument 18 Plug 30. Magnetic switch (starter

light 19. Rudder angle indicator contactor)

F1-4 - Continued

1-7
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-5. Electrical system schematic, hull numbers LCM 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (Rohr Corp).

1-8
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Receptacles (3) main 14 Toggle switch, pal 25 Engine room receptacle 40.Resistor, voltage

mast lights lights 26.Interior lights, engine regulator

2. Stern light (white) 15.Panel light room (8) 41.Toggle switch, engine

3 Static isolator (MX8171) 16.Toggle switch, cargo 27.Engine start switches room lights

4. Communications cabinet lights (on each engine) (4) 42 Battery

5. Port side light (red) 17.Panel light 28.Terminal board and 43. Circuit breaker, stable

6. Control and distribution 18 Horn enclose isolator

panel 19. Masthead light (white) 29. Starting motors () 44. Terminal board and

7. Heading indicator 20. Not-under command 30. Engine start contactor water tight enclosure

8 Terminal board and lights (2) red 31. Temperature switch 45. Power supply, rudder

watertight enclosure 21 Connectors, masthead 32. Cargo well lights (red) angle indicator

9. Starboard side light and "not-under com- 33.Engine room fan 46.Induction compass

(green) mand" lights (3) 34. Receptacle, fan transmitter

10. Engine alarm panel 22 Rudder angle indicator 35. Receptacle, anchor light 47.Terminal board and

11 Toggle switch, naviga transmitter 36. Connector, anchor light watertight enclosure

lights 23. Interior lights, lazarette 37. Anchor light (white)

12. Horn button (2) 38. Alternator with voltage

13 Rotary switch, navig 24. Toggle switch, lazarette protector

tion lights 39. Voltage regulator

Fig 1-5--Continued

1-9
TM 55-1905-217-12

H.P., maximum r.p.m. no-load, and a list of optional

equipment.

(3) Power transfer gear plate. Located on the

power transfer gear housing at rear of propulsion unit,

includes power transfer gear part number and serial

number.

b. Instruction Plates.

(1) Engine starting instructions plate. In landing

craft with hull number 8500 thru 8539, this plate is

located in the pilot house.

(2) Ramp hoist operating instructions. This plate

is located in the pilot house.

(3) Emergency steering instruction plate.

In hull number 8500 thru 8539, this plate is located in the

pilot house. In hull numbers 840 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618, this plate is located in the lazarette of the landing

craft.

c. Tabulated Data. Descriptive data of the LCM is listed

in table 1-1, Tabulated Data

1-10
TM 55-1905-217-12

Table 1-1. Tabulated Data

a. Landing Craft

Length, overall........................................................................ 74 ft. (ft)

Length, overall, hull, molded .................................................. 71 ft 6 3/4 in.

Length, designed, waterline, molded...................................... 63 ft. 3 1/2 in.

Beam, extreme ....................................................................... 21 ft. 0 5/8 in.

Beam, molded ....................................................................... 20ft. 11 3/4 in.

Depth, molded amidships....................................................... 9 ft 4 In.

Draft (full load)........................................................................ 4 ft 6 in

Speed, maximum loaded........................................................ 9 knots

b. Propulsion Units

Manufacturer .......................................................................... Detroit Diesel

Type ................................................................................... Twin engine units

Models ................................................................................... 12005A 12006A port

Cylinders................................................................................. 6 (per engine)

Bore ................................................................................... 4.25in

Stroke ................................................................................... 5 in.

Displacement.......................................................................... 425cu in. (per engine)

Fuel _................................................................................. Diesel

Rating (100° F 29 in. Hg)........................................................ 300 HP at 1800 RPM continuous

Fuel consumption ................................................................... 21.5 GPH (each engine)

Fuel tank capacity (2) ............................................................ 432 gal each tank

Firing order

R. H. rotation (stbd) ................................................................ 1-5-3-6-2-4

L. H. rotation (port) ................................................................. 1-4-2-6-3-5

Fresh water capacity (4 engines) .......................................... 9 gallons (each engine)

Propeller shaft rotation ........................................................... Starboard-clockwise Port-counterclockwise

Transmission .......................................................................... Allison hydraulic

c. Electric Starting and Alternator System (24 vdc), Outboard Engines.

Starting motor (clockwise rotation) ......................................... Delco 1108850

Starting motor (counter-clockwise rotation)....Delco 1108890

Alternator................................................................................ Motorola 24A107G (hull numbers 8500 thru 8539)

Alternato ................................................................................. Motorola 8SA-3006 (hull number- 8540 thru 8560 and 

................................................................................... 80 thru 8618)

d. Hydraulic Starting System, Inboard Engines.

Pumps (2)............................................................................... General Motors 6256

Cranking motor (clockwise rotation) ....................................... Bosch CMD2A1IU

Cranking motor (counter clock wise rotation)......................... Bosch CMD2A221

Accumulators (2) .................................................................... Bosch ACB30A7109

Hand pump............................................................................. Bosch HPAS00118

Filter ................................................................................... Bosch FRH3001.16

Filter, inlet ............................................................................_ Bosch FRK300282-3 (hull numbers8540 thru 8560 

................................................................................... and 8580 thru 8618)

1-11
e. Hydraulic Steering System

Marinette Marine Gunderson Brothers 

Hull registry numbers Hull registry numbers 

LCM-8500 thru LCM-8520 thru 

LCM-8519 LCM-8539 

(1) Helm unit Char Lynn UE-01 with SCA Column Char Lynn WK-11-SCC Char Lynn WK-11-SCC(2) Pump Vickers V200-5-1C-S85 Vickers V110-35-1C-S214 (2) Vickers V110-25-1C-10(3 Pump Vickers V200-5-1CLH-S85 Vickers V200-5-1CLH S85 Vickers V110-25-1C-10-LH(4) Cylinder (2) Ortman Miller 2TH-Style G Ortman Miller 2TH-Style G Ortman Miller 2kTH-Style G(5) Filter (return line) Gresen FB101 Gresen FB101 Grf. Ramp Hoist System. (Hydraulic).

Marinette Marine Gunderson Brothers 

Hull registry numbers Hull registry numbers 

LCM-8500 thru LCM-8520 thru 

LCM-8519 LCM-8539 

(1) Winch Marco No. W-0951 Gearmatic 22-SCL10 Gearma(2) Winch Denison M1D-117-21N Gearmatic (winch component) Gearma(3) Pump right Vickers 25V17A-1C10-002 Vickers 35V25A-1C-10-132 Vickers (4) Pump (left)) Vickers 25 V17A-1C10-L-002 Vickers 35V25A-1C-10-L-132 Vickers (5) Control valve Vickers CM2-NO2-R20B-L-30 Vickers CM3No2R20-BL-30 Vickers (6) Tank 75 gal. Marco H-0131 75 gallons 75 gallo(7) Suction strainer Michigan Dynamics MP-75 Jelliff J75-600-100-2-1/2NPTF Jelliff J7(8) Return line filter Gresen NFB-401 Gresen FB-408 Gresen g. Bilge Drainage System (hull numbers LCM-8560 and LCM-8580 thru LCM-8618)Pumps, port engine driven ................................................................................ MP Pump Co. Model 3800 M-LH MP Pump Co. Model 3600 M-LHPump, starboard engine driven ................................................................................ MP Pump Co. Model 3600 M-RHPump, manual (2) ................................................................................ Wilcox Crittenden 542Strainers (8) ................................................................................ MP Pump Co. Model 2225 Ah. Engine Cooling System (fresh water) (hull numbers LCM-8540 thru LCM-8560 and LCM-8580 thru LCM-8618). Capacity,each propulsion system 9 gallons each.Pumps (2) ................................................................................ Detroit DieselTanks (2) ................................................................................ Copper, 10-inch O. D. x 15, 25 inches longHeat exchangers (2) ................................................................................ BUSHIPS Drawing C-3166915i. Sea (raw) Water System (hull numbers LCM-8540 thru LCM-8560 and LCM-8580 thru LCM-8618.Pumps (4) ................................................................................ Detroit DieselStrainers, dual (2) ................................................................................ Groco HD 2000Aj. Fuel System (hull numbers LCM-8540 thru LCM-8560 and LCM-8580 thru LCM-8618).Fuel tanks, capacity (2) ................................................................................ 432 gallons eachGovernors (2) ................................................................................ Limiting speed type, setting 108 percent rated speedPrimary strainers (2) ................................................................................ Purolator 63108-3

1-12
Engine fuel strainers (2) .................................................................................................... Purolator 63108-3Engine fuel filters (2) ......................................................................................................... Detroit DieselFuel pumps (4) ................................................................................................................... Detroit DieselCooler, fuel oil (4) .............................................................................................................. Detroit Diesel Part No. S136348k. Navigational and Communication Equipment (hull numbers LCM-8540 thru LCM-8560 and LCM-8580 thru LCM-8613).Remote magnetic heading system (RMHS) ...................................................................... SperryStatic isolation equipment ................................................................................................ MX-8171/URCRadio Set AN/GRC-106Radio Set AN/SRC-32Radio Set AN/VRC-46Radio Set AN/VRC-47

Note

The AN/GRC-106 or AN/SRC-32 and AN/VRC-47 may be installed in the LCM-8 landing craft.

1-13
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-6. Hydraulic starting system diagram, hull numbers LCM 8500 thru 8519 (Marinette Marine).

1-14
TM 5-1905-217-12

Figure 1-7. Hydraulic starting system diagram, hull number LCM 8520 thru 8539 (Gunderson Brothers).

1-15
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-8. Hydraulic starting system functioning diagram, hull numbers LCM 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (Rohr

Corp).

1-16
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-9. Hydraulic steering system diagram, numbers LCM 8500 thru 8519 (Marinette Marine).

1-17
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-10. Hydraulic steering system diagram, hull numbers LCM 8520 thru 8539 (Gunderson Brothers).

1-18
Figure 1-11. Hydraulic steering system functional diagram, hull numbers LCM 8540 thru 8560 and LCM 8580 thru 8618

(Rohr Corporation).

1-20
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Starboard engine driven 6. Ball valves (8) 13.Return line filter and 18. Port engine

driven pump

pump 7. Counterbalance valves ondition indicator 19. Steering syst

flow

2 Steering system hydrau- (2) 14. Steering system reservoir divider valve

lic pressure gage 8. Emergency tiller 15. Steering system fill cap 20. Check valve (2)

3 Starboard emergency 9. Port emergency 16. Steering system reser- 21. Relief valve

tiller access plate tiller access plate voir level indicator and

4 Clevis pin (2). Remove 10. Port actuating cylinder fluid temperature

when using emergency 11. Port rudder indicator

tiller 12 Engine room aft bulk- 17. Ramp hoist hydraulic

5. Rudder angle stop head system reservoir (ref.)

bracket

Fig. 1-11 - Continued

1-21
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-12. Ramp hoist hydraulic system diagram, hull number LCM 8500 thru LCM 8519 (Marinette Marine).

1-22
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-13. Ramp hoist hydraulic system diagram, hull numbers LCM 8520 thru LCM 8539-Gunderson Brothers).

1-23
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-14.1. Ramp hoist system hydraulic functional diagram. (Sheet 1 of 2).

1-24
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-14.2. Ramp hoist system hydraulic functional diagram. (Sheet 2of 2).

1-25
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-15.1. Bilge drainage system functional diagram. (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-26
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-15.2. Bilge drainage system functional diagram. (Sheet 2 of 2).

1-27
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-16. Engine fresh water system functional diagram.

1-28
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-17. Engine raw sea water system functional diagram.

1-29
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 1-18. Engine Fuel system functional diagram.

 1-30
1 Starboard propulsion 4. Starboard system return 8. Port reservoir fill and 11. Port sy

unit shutoff valve vent off v

2. Starboard system pri- 5. Relief valve 9. Port reservoir 12 Port sy

mary fuel filter 6. Starboard reservoir 10. Port system return shut- fuel 

3. Starboard system supply 7. Starboard reservoir fill off valve 13. Engine 

shutoff valve and vent port 14. Engine 

15 Drain V

Figure 1-18 - Continued

1-31
TM 55-1905-217-12

CHAPTER 2

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION I. OPERATING PROCEDURES

WARNING

If equipment fails to operate refer to

troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 3.

2-1. General

This section describes, locates, illustrates, and furnishes

the operator and/or crew with sufficient information for

the proper operation of the vessel. Throughout the

vessel the control valves and electrical circuits and

switches are located and identified by the appropriate

nomenclature plates.

2-2. Controls and Instruments

a. Pilot House Controls.

(1) A separate stop for each engine is located

on the pilot house control panel. To stop the engines,

pull the handles the full length of their travel and hold

them at full length until the engine stops. The engine

stop control (2, fig. 2-1) is for hull numbers 8500 through

8529. The engine stop control (12, fig. 2-2) is for hull

numbers 8520 through 8539. The engine stop control

(13, fig. 2-3) is for hull numbers 8540 through 8560 and

8580 through 8618.

(2) A separate neutral throttle control for each

engine or each propulsion unit is located on the pilot

house control panel. These controls are provided for

regulation of the idle speed or for controlling engine

speed when the ramp is to be lowered or raised. The

neutral throttle control (3, fig. 2-1) is for hull numbers

8500 through 8529. The neutral throttle control (13

, fig. 2-2) is for hull numbers 8520 through 8539. The neutral

throttle controls (15 and 16 fig. 2-3) are used for hull

numbers 8540 through 8560 and 8580 through 8618.

(3) Separate starter control buttons (hull

numbers 8500 through 8519) for each engine are located

on the distribution panel in the pilot house. The starter

buttons (fig. 2-4) for the outboard engines control electric starters, while the two

buttons (fig. 2-4) for the inboard engines control hydraulic

starters. The electric starter control buttons (34 and 43,

fig. 2-5) control electric starters, while the hydraulic

starter control buttons (36 and 41, fig. 2-5) control

hydraulic starters (hull numbers 8540 through 8560 and

8580 through 8618). Push the buttons to start the

engines. Release promptly when the engine starts.

(4) The engine starter control buttons (hull

numbers 8520 through 8539) for controlling the electric

starters (21, fig. 2-2) for the outboard engines are located

on the distribution panel. Push the buttons to start the

engines. Release promptly when the engines start. Two

control handles for control of the hydraulic starters

(inboard engines) are mounted on top of the control

panel. Pull the handles out to start the engines. Release

promptly when the engines start.

(5) The starting aid controls used on hull

numbers 8500 through 8519 have a separate primer

control mounted on each engine, and are to be used for

cold weather starting. Hull numbers 8520 through 8560

and 8580 through 8618 do not have such controls. On

these craft the primer fuel cylinders are stored in the

engine room and must -be individually applied to the

injectors on each engine.

(6) The engine control levers (14, fig. 2-1) on

hull numbers 8500 through 8539, have single levers (fig.

2-7) for each propulsion unit. These levers control both

the clutches and throttle in proper sequence. Hull

numbers 8540 through 8560 and 8580 through 8618

have separate reverse gear levers (21, fig. 2-8.1) for each

propulsion unit. The reverse gear levers are interlocked

with the throttle controls to prevent clutch engagement or

disengagement except at idle rpm.

(7) The horn buttons (4, fig. 2-1), hull numbers

8500 through 8519; (23, fig. 2-2) hull numbers 8520

through 8539; or (8, fig. 23) hull

2-1
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Radio receptacle 11. transmission oil pressure 19. Overspeed shutoff

2. Engine atop control 12. Rudder angle indicator 20. Steering wheel

3. Neutral throttle control 13. Battery charge ammeter 21. Distribution pane (in4. Horn button 14. Engine control levers cludes starter buttons)

5. Engine alarm panel 15. Engine oil pressure 22. Ramp hoist control valve

6. Receptacle 16. Steering hydraulic lever

7. Engine tachometer pressure 23. RHMS heeding indicator

8. Alternator ammeter 17. Ramp hoist hydraulic

9. Receptacle pressure

10 Engine water tempera- 18. Starting hydraulic

ture gage pressure

Figure 2-1. Pilot house controls and instrument, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519.

number 8540 through 8560 and 8580 through 8618 ’are

used to sound the horns.

(8) The steering wheel (20, fig. 2-1), (17, fig. 2-2)

, or (20, fig. 2-3) is used to change the course of the

craft. The steering is hydraulic powered. If the steering

pumps should fail, the helm unit acts as a hand -pump

when the wheel is turned.

(9) The ramp hoist control valve lever (22, fig.

2-1), hull numbers 8500 through 8519; (11,fig. 2-2), hull

numbers 8520 through 8539; or (18, fig. 2-3), hull

numbers 8540 through 8560 and 8580 through 8618 is

used to control operation of the hydraulic powered ramp

winch.

(10) The navigation lights switches (fig. 2-4), (3

and 4, fig. 2-2), or (4 and 5, fig. 2-3) are used to control

the navigation lights. They are to be set in the position

as instructed on the switch information plate which is

mounted above the switches.

(11) The light switches are used to control

various lights and receptacles on the landing craft. On

hull numbers 8500 through 8519, switches are located on

the distribution panel, in the engine room, and in the

lazarette. Hull numbers 8520 through 8560 and 8580

through 8618, have switches in similar locations and

additional switches above the control panel.

Change 1 2-2
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Radio receptacle 9. Engine oil pressure 18. Alternator ammeter

2. Engine alarm panel 10. Engine water tempe 19. Battery charge ammeter

3. Rotary switch, naviga- ture 20. Hydraulic Barter

tional lights 11. Receptacle controls

4. Toggle switch, naviga- 12. Engine stop control 21. Electric starter controls

tional lights 13. Neutral throttle control 22. Distribution panel

5. Switch, cargo well lights levers 23. Horn button

6. Rotary switch, panel 14. Engine control levers 24. Ramp hoist control valve

lights 16. Transmission oil pressure lever

7. Tachometer 16. Rudder angle indicator 25. RHMS heading indicator

8. Compass outlet 17. steering wheel

Figure 2-2. Pilot house control and instruments, hull numbers 8510 thru 8509.

b. Engine Room Controls

(1) The engine throttle controls (fig. 2-7.1) are

separate throttle controls for each engine and are

mounted at the rear of the propulsion unit.

(2) The throttle control of the propulsion unlit on

hull numbers 8540 through 8560 and 8580 through 8618

(fig. 2-6) is accomplished by pulling, out and rotating the

pin (16, fig. 2-8.1) on the control 90 degrees. Throttle

control of each individual engine is accomplished by

pulling up on the individual throttle lever mounted on

the rear of each unit. When the lever is pulled up (pin

disengaged), the lever can be moved independently to

control the individual engine.

(3) The shift control for hull numbers 8500

through 8518 has a master shift and throttle control 

(fig. 2-7) which provides the same control as the levers in the

pilot house.

(4) The shift control (fig. 2-6.1) is used to shift the

transmission. To shift the transmission in the engine

room the cable from the pilot house

2-3
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Communications cabinet 9. Instrument lights 16. Starboard propulsion

2. Engine alarm panel 10. Port instrument panel unit throttle control

3. Engine emergency stop (ref. fig.2-5) 17. Starboard propulsion

controls (1 for each 11. RMMS heading indicator unit reverse gear

engine) 12. Starboard instrument control

4. Rotary switch, running lights panel (ref. fig. 2-5) 18. Ramp hoist control valve

5. Toggle switch, masthead 13. Engine stop control (1 lever

or anchor lights for each engine) 19. Pilot control stand

6. Toggle switch, panel 14. Port propulsion unit reverse grating cups

lights gear control 20. Landing craft hoist data

7. Toggle switch cargo well 15. Port propulsion unit 21. Steering wheel

lights throttle control 22. Control panel

8. Horn button

Figure 2-3. Pilot house controls and instruments, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

must be disconnected. A quick disconnect is provided

for this purpose. The throttle controls are separate.

(5) The reverse gear control (21, fig. 2-8.1) of the

propulsion unit for hull numbers 8540 through 8560 and

8580 through 8618 is in the engine room. Operation is

accomplished by pulling out and rotating the pin (16, fig.

2-8.1) on the control 90 degrees. Control of an individual

engine transmission is accomplished by the shutoff

control valves on the propulsion unit transmission.

(6) The neutral shift levers (fig. 2-7.1) are used if

it is necessary to shut down one engine of a propulsion

unit. If shut down is necessary ,push the neutral shift

lever forward.

(7) The engine electric start button control (fig. 2-9)

 is mounted on a vertical support near each outboard

engine on hull numbers 8500 through 8519. On hull

numbers 8520 through 8560 and 8580 through 8618, this

control is mounted on the upper engine block of each out

board engine. This control is used to start outboard

engines from the engine room.

Change 1 2-4
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-4. Distribution panel

2-5
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-5. Distribution panel

2-6
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Alternator ammeter 15. Starboard inboard engine 30. Fuse, 10 amp, cargo well

(port) propulsion unit oil pressure lights and instrument

2. Port outboard engine 16. Port inboard engine panel light

tachometer coolant temperature 31. Fuse, 15 amp, engii

3. Battery ammeter 17. Port inboard engine room lights

4. Port inboard engine oil pressure 32. Fuse, 10 amp, spare

tachometer 18. Ramp hydraulic system 33. Switch, engine alarm

6. RMHS Heading Indicator pressure circuit test

6. Starboard inboard engine 19. Transmission oil pressure 34. Electric starter button,

coolant temperature port propulsion unit starboard outboard

7. Starboard inboard engine 20. Starting system hydraulic engine

tachometer pressure 35. Switch, cargo well

8. Alternator ammeter 21. Port outboard engine 36. Hydraulic starter button,

(starboard propulsion oil pressure starboard inboard

unit) 22. Port outboard engine engine

9. Transmission oil pressure coolant temperature 37. Switch, engine room

(starboard propulsion 23. Fuse, 10 amp, navigation lights

unit) lights 38. Switch, spare

10. Starboard outboard 24. Fuse, 10 amp, lazarette 39. Switch, spare

engine tachometer light, engine room fan, 40. Switch, RMHS

11. Starboard outboard and engine room 41. Hydraulic starter button,

engine coolant tempera- receptacle port inboard engine

ture 25. Fuse, 5 amp RMHS 42. Switch, lazarette lights

12. Starboard outboard 26. Fuse, 10 amp spare 43. Electric starter button,

engine oil pressure 27. Not used port outboard engine

13. Steering system hydrau- 28. Not used 44. Switch, navigation Lights

lic pressure 29. Fuse, 10 amp, engine

14. Rudder angle indicator alarm lights

Figure 2-5 - Continued

(8) The hydraulic starter control valve (fig. 2-10)

can be manually actuated to start the inboard engines

that are started by the hydraulic starting motors.

(9) The hydraulic starting control valves and the

solenoid valve on hull numbers 8540 through 8560 and

8580 through 8618 are located on each inboard engine

(fig. 2-11). Engine room starting capability is provided by

a pushbutton located on each engine instrument panel.

The solenoid control valve contains a manual override

which allows opening of the valve if electrical circuits fail.

The override shutoff valve is normally open. In the event

of electrical failure, the shutoff valve is manually closed

allowing accumulator hydraulic pressure to open the

control valve and port pressure to the applicable

hydraulic cranking motor. A fuel pressure switch is

interlocked with the hydraulic starter control valves to

prevent the accidental engagement of the hydrostarters

when the engine is running.

WARNING

In the event of fire in the engine room, close

the fuel supply valve from the tank

immediately.

(10) Each fuel tank has a supply valve and a

return valve (,fig. 2-12). Both valves must be open when

using fuel from a tank.

(11) On hull numbers 8540 through 8560 and

8580 through 8618, there is one supply valve from each

fuel reservoir. When open allows fuel to flow from

reservoir to propulsion unit. Both reservoir valves should

be open prior to starting engines. A cross-over system

allows one reservoir to supply fuel to either or both

propulsion units. To operate ,all engines from one

reservoir, open only one supply valve. There is one

return valve to each fuel reservoir. When open, they

allow fuel to flow in the return lines from propulsion units

to the reservoirs. Both shutoff vale should be open prior

to starting engines. A cross-over system allows returning

fuel from both propulsion units to flow into one reservoir.

(12) The sea water seacocks are located in the

compartment below the aft end of the cargo well. Access

to this compartment is through the scuttle in the

starboard side of the cargo well. One seacock is on the

port side and one starboard. Both seacocks must be

open before the engines are started.

(13) The sea water seacocks on hull numbers

8540 through 8560 and 8580 through 8618 are located

on the engine room aft bulkhead (fig. 1-16).

2-7
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-6.1. Engine control in engine room

(Sheet 1 of 2)

 When open they allow inlet flow of sea water

through the sea chests for engine muffler cooling. Both

6eacocks must be opened prior to starting the engines.

(14) Two sea water discharge valves (fig. 2-13)

are located on each side of the engine room. These

valves must be opened (1/2 open) before engines are

started.

(15) The bilge pump prime valves are located in

prime lines between the sea water system and the three

bilge pumps. The valves must be opened before engines

are started.

(16) The bilge pump suction valves (fig. 2-14)

are located in the suction line to each of

the three bilge pumps. Open valves as needed to pump

water out of the bilge compartments.

(17) On hull numbers 8540 through 8560 and

8580 through 8618 incorporate clutch drive bilge pumps.

As shown in fig. 1-14.2 , two pumps are driven

by the port inboard engine and one pump is driven by the

starboard inboard engine. Each pump incorporates a

friction drive clutch plate and manual clutch lever. The

belt driven pulley on each pump is engaged or

disengaged with the pump shaft and impeller by

movement of the clutch lever. The clutch normally is

disengaged and would be engaged only when needed to

drain a compartment. The clutch can be engaged or

disengaged at any engine rpm.

(18) The bilge pump overboard discharge valves

(fig. 2-15) are located on the port side of the engine room

and one valve is located on the starboard side. All three

valves must be open when engines are running. In hull

numbers 8500 thru 8539, all three valves must be open

when engines are running.

(19) The nine bilge line valves (fig. 2-14) are

located forward in the engine room. These valves are

opened as needed to pump out the various bilge

compartments.

(20) The hydraulic steering suction valve, hull

numbers 8500 through 8519 (fig. 2-16), is located at

bottom of steering system tank in the engine room. The

valve must be open before engines are started. The

Gunderson and Rohr crafts do not have a valve for this

purpose because the hydraulic fluid is pumped out

through the top of the tank.

(21) The ramp hoist hydraulic system supply

valve, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 (fig. 2-16), is located

at bottom of ramp hoist system tank in the engine room.

This valve must be open when the ramp hoist system

pump is operating. Close this valve only for periods of

maintenance or prolonged shutdown. Hull numbers 8520

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 do not have a valve for this

purpose because the suction line enters the tank through

the top.

(22) The hydraulic starting system tank valves,

hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 (fig. 2-17) and 8540 thru

8560 and 8580 thru 861-8 (fig. 2-18), are located at

bottom of tank on starboard side of engine room. Valves

must be open when engines are running. Hull numbers

8520 thru8539 do not have similar valves.

(23) The starting system accumulators and

valves (fig. 2-19 and fig. 2-20 for hull numbers 8540

through 8560 and 8580 thru 8618). Two accumulators

with shutoff valves are located in

2-8
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-6.2. Engine controls in engine room. (Sheet 2 of 2)

the engine room. Prior to starting an inboard engine, the

valve controlling the accumulator for the engine to be

started must be opened. A crossover system allows

starting of an engine from either accumulator.

(24) The hydraulic starting system hand pump

and valve (fig. 2-21, hull numbers 8500 thru 8539 and fig.

2-22, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618)

are located on the port side of the port propulsion unit.

The hand pump is used to restore pressure in the

accumulators if engines are not running. The hand pump

shutoff valve on hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618 is located near the port accumulator.

(25) The steering system valves, pump

discharge (fig. 2-23), are not used on hull numbers 8520

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618. This paragraph applies to

hull numbers 8500 thru 8519. Only one steering pump is

needed to supply the steering system, so one is closed at

all times. Valves are located aft in engine room.

(26) The steering system valves, cylinders (fig.

2-24), are in the lazarette and are used

only if it is necessary to isolate a cylinder because of

failure.

(27) The clutch lever, ramp hoist system pumps

(fig. 2-25), includes two pumps. The winch may be

operated by using one or both pumps.

c. Emergency Winch Controls (fig. 2-26.1).

(1) Emergency controls are provided to lower

the ramp if the ramp hydraulic system should fail. These

controls are located at or near the winch. The winch on

hull number 8500 thru 8519 is located forward on the port

side and hull number 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618

the winch is located forward on the starboard side.

(2) Refer to fig. 2-26.1 for emergency lowering

of the winch.

d. Pilot House Instruments and Gages. See figure

2-1 for hull numbers 8500 thru &519 instruments; figure

2-2 for hull numbers 8520 thru 8539 instruments; and

figure 2-3 for hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618 instruments.

(1) Engine tachometers. Four tachometers are

included in the panel, one tachometer for

2-9
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-7.1. Engine room controls and indicator hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618. (Sheet 1 of 2)

each of the four engines. Engine speeds are indicated in

revolutions per minute.

(2) Alternator ammeters. A separate ammeter

is provided for each of the two alternators. The

ammeters indicate the alternator output. The scale reads

from 0 to 100-amperes.

(3) Battery charge ammeter. This meter

indicates battery charge rate and discharge rate in

amperes. The scale reads from 0-to 200-charge and 0-

to 200-discharge.

(4) Engine water temperature gages. A

separate temperature gage for each of the four en-

 2-10
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-7.2. Engine room controls and indicators, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618. (Sheet 2 of 2)

gines is mounted on the panel. The gages indicate the

temperature of the coolant being circulated through the

engine.

(5) Transmission oil pressure gage. The

control panel contains a separate gage for each of the

two propulsion units.

(6) Engine oil pressure gages. There are four

oil pressure gages, one for each of the four engines.

(7) Starting system hydraulic pressure gage.

The gage (18, fig. 2-1) hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and

(20, fig. 2-5) hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618, only on hull numbers listed, indicate the pressure

available for starting inboard engines.

(8) Ramp hoist hydraulic System pressure

gage (17, fig. 2-1). Furnished on hull numbers 8500 thru

8619 and (18, fig. 2-5) on hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8’580 thru 8618. When a ramp

hoist pump is operating, the gage indicates the pressure

in the system.

(9) Steering hydraulic pressure gage (16, fig. 2-1) 

Furnished on hull numbers 8500 thru 8519. This gage

indicates the pressure available in the steering hydraulic

system to operate the rudders.

(10) Rudder angle indicator. The indicator will

show the position of the rudders. It is connected to a

sender located in the lazarette at the port side rudder

post

(11) Sight glass, steering system 8 gallon

expansion tank, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 (fig. 2-27).

Tank is mounted aft in the pilot house. Oil level in the

tank should ,be within one inch of the red center line of

the sight glass.

2-11
TM 55-1905-217-12

ME 1905-217-12/2-8 (1)

1. Bolt 9. Rod 18. Engine marine gear oil

2. Turnbuckle 10. Lever shutoff valve

3. Plot house to engine 11. Turnbuckle 19. Marine gear selector

room reverse gear con- 12. Governor speed control control valve

trol rod rod 20. Rod

4. Governor speed control 13. Bolt 21. Propulsion unit reverses

rod 14. Lever gear control

5. Throttle control cross 15. Engine room propulsion 22. Manual disconnect pin

shaft unit throttle control 23. Rod and turnbuckle

6. Turnbuckle 16. Manual disconnect pin 24. Reverse gear control

7. Pilot house to engine 17. Throttle control knob knob (red)

room throttle control rod (black) 25. Turnbuckle

8. Engine throttle levers

Figure 2-8.1. Propulsion unit control diagram, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618. (Sheet 1 of 2)

2-12
TM 55-1905-217-12

26. Governor speed control 28. Throttle shaft lever

rod 29. Engine stop control cable

27. Speed control lever

Figure 2-8.2. Propulsion unit controls diagram, hull numbers

8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618. (Sheet 2 of 2)

e. Engine Room Instruments and Gages.

(1) Sight glasses, ramp hoist hydraulic system tank

and steering tank. These tanks are equipped with sight

glasses on all craft. Oil temperatures are also indicated on

the gages on hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618.

(2) Sight glass, fresh water cooling system

expansion tanks (fig. 2-28). There are two expansion tanks,

one on each side of the engine room. The coolant level

should be visible in the sight glass at all times.

(3) Ramp hoist hydraulic filter gage (fig. 1-13 or fig.

2-29). The gage is located adjacent to the return line filter on

the engine room aft bulkhead. The gage indicates element

condition.

(4) Steering system filter gage (fig. 2-30). The gage

is located adjacent to the reburn line filter on engine room aft

bulkhead. The gage indicates filter condition. (Hull numbers

8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618).

f. Ramp-Slack Cable System (Hull numbers 8500 thru

8519). When the ramp is lowered and comes to rest on some

surface; the cable will continue to pay out from the winch

unless it is immediately shut off. This causes the cable to

bind and kink when attempting to raise the ramp

B. HULL NO.85200 THRU 8539

Figure 2-9. Engine electric start button in engine room.

to the closed position. A system of limit switches, a cable

shield, and a directional control valve have been added

to remedy this operational problem. Briefly, the system

works in the following way:

(1) The limit switch, located in the pilot house

aft of the ramp control lever energizes the

system when the ramp control lever is

pulled.

(2) The limit switch at the ramp is activated as

soon -as slack exists in the cable.

(3) The solenoid valve shuts off the hydraulic

fluid to the cable winch and returns it to the

reservoir thereby not allowing any more

cable to pay out.

2-13
TM 55-1905-217-12

g. Winch Automatic Reversing Mechanism (Hull

Numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (fig. 2-9.1).

 The above hull numbers incorporate an automatic

winch reversing mechanism. The mechanism, attached

to the ramp winch, prevents cable overrun and coiling

when the ramp lowering cycle is completed or

interrupted. When the cable goes slack, the direction of

rotation is automatically reversed.

Figure 2-9.1. Winch automatic reversing mechanism (hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618).

Change 1 2-14
TM 55-1905-217-12

B. HULL NO. 8520 THRU 8539

Figure 2-10. Hydraulic starting control valves in engine

room.

2-3. Starting

a. Preparation for starting.

(1) Perform the before-operation services

(para. 3-4).

(2) Lubricate the landing craft as specified in

the current lubrication order.

(3) Open the two sea water seacocks (para 2-1b(13)).

(4) Open the four sea water discharge valves

1/2 open (fig. 2-13).

(5) Disengage the three bilge pump clutches on

hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (fig. 1-14.1).

(6) Open fuel supply and return valves at each

tank (fig. 2-13).

(7) Disengage the two ramp hoist pump

clutches (fig. 2-25).

(8) Open the hydraulic steering suction valve

(fig. 2-16).

(9) Open one of the two hydraulic starting.

system accumulator valves (fig. 2-19 and fig. 2-20) and

the two starting system tank valves (fig. 2-17) or suction

valves (fig. 2-18).

b. Starting the Engines.

(1) Figure 2-1 provides engine starting

instructions for hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 8520

thru 8539. Figure 2-32 provides engine starting

instructions for hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618.

(2) As engines warm up, check operating

temperatures and pressures.

(3) Hydraulic dead start. If there is insufficient

pressure in accumulators, the hand pump may be used

to -provide initial starting pressure as follows:

(a) Open accumulator valves (fig. 2-19 or

2-20) and (on hull numbers 8500 thru 8519) open the

starting tank valve (fig. 2-17).

(b) Open hand pump discharge valve (fig.

2-20 or 2-21).

(c) Pump accumulators with hand pump,

to 2000 psi minimum.

(d) Close hand pump discharge valve.

(e) Start engine by pushing button (hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618) or pulling handle (hull numbers 8520 thru

8539) in pilot house or by actuating the valve (fig. 2-10) in

the engine room.

(4) Emergency starting. The outboard engine

of each propulsion unit has an electric starter and each

inboard engine has a hydraulic starter. If either the

electric system or the hydraulic system should fail, one

engine of a propulsion unit can be used to start the other

by actuating the clutches.

c. Starting Engine with Engine Room Controls.

Engines can be started and operated by using controls in

the engine room. See figures 2-6, 2-7.1, 2-9.1, 2-10, and 2-11.

2-4. Stopping the Engines

Figure 2-33 provides engine stopping instructions for hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 8520 thru 8539. Figure 2-34

 provides engine stopping instructions for hull numbers

8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

Change 1 2-14.1/(2-14.2 blank)
TM 55-1905-217-12

ME 1905-217-12/2-11

Figure 2-11. Hydraulic starting system solenoid control valve, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

2-5. Operation of Landing Craft

a. Normal Operation. Refer to figure 2-35 or 2-36,

as applicable.

b. Emergency Engine Controls. Auxiliary controls

for emergency shifting and throttle control are located in

the engine room. See figure 2-6.1 or 2-7.1 for hull numbers

8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

NOTE

If it is necessary to shut down one

engine of a propulsion unit, push the

neutral shift lever forward.

c. Emergency Steering.

(1) If one steering pump or one engine should

fail, the steering system will continue to operate. On hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519, close the shut-off valve (fig. 2-23)

 for the pump that is not operating.

(2) If both steering pumps or the engines

should fail, steering can be accomplished by turning the

steering wheel so the helm unit will act as a pump to

actuate the steering cylinders.

NOTE

Hull numbers 8500 thru 8519. Close

both shutoff valves (fig. 2-33) if both

pumps or both engines fail.

(3) In case of failure of all hydraulic steering,

use the emergency tiller as follows:

(a) Pull out access plate in deck over

one rudder stock.

(b) Insert emergency tiller (fig. 2-37) at

open rudder stock.

(c) Enter the lazarette and pull out eye

pins to disconnect the hydraulic cylinders and tie rod.

2-6. Operation of Ramp Hoist

a. General.

(1) On hull numbers 8500 thru 8518 the ramp

hoist system supply valve, located at the bottom of the

ramp hoist system tank, must be open at all times when

equipment is operating. Close valve only for periods of

maintenance or prolonged shut down.

(2) Check filter (fig. 2-29) and strainer

indicators (fig. 2-38) when in operation. Shut down

system and clean filter or strainer when indicator shows

that oil is bypassing the element (red indicator).

(3) Operate only one ramp hoist pump at a

time. On hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618, the system will operate with one engine-driven

pump in operation; however, if maximum ramp hoist rate

is required, both pumps must .be in operation.

2-15
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-12. Fuel system valves.

b. Normal Operation to Lower Ramp.

(1) Ramp hoist valve (fig. 2-3 for hull

numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618) must be in

neutral position.

(2) On hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 be sure

the supply valve, located at the bottom of the ramp hoist

system tank, is open.

(3) With engine running, start hydraulic ramp

hoist pump (one only) by engaging clutch (fig. 2-25).

(4) Disconnect load binders (fig. 2-39) at

ramp (both sides).

Figure 2-13. Sea water discharge valve.

(5) Move hoist valve lever (fig. 2-35) to

RAMP DOWN.

( (6) Neutral throttle (fig. 2-31 or 2-32 for hull

numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618) may be

used to accelerate raising or lowering ramp.

(7) Move hoist valve lever to NEUTRAL

position when ramp is lowered and cable is slack.

c. Normal Operation to Raise Ramp.

(1) Move ramp control valve lever (fig. 2-36

for hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 and

fig. 2-35) to RAMP UP.

(2) When ramp is raised, return lever to

NEUTRAL position and secure load binders (fig. 2-39).

(3) Disengage pump clutch (fig. 2-25).

d. Emergency Operation to Lower Ramp.

(1) Disconnect load binders (fig. 2-39).

(2) Refer to figure 2-26.1 and lower ramp.

e. Emergency Operation to Raise Ramp.

(1) Use chain hoists (2) as shown in figure 2-39.

 Hoists are stored in the lazarette.

(2) Secure load binders.

2-16
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-14. Bilge pumps, lines and valves.

 2-17
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-15. Bilge overboard discharge valves.

Figure 2-16. Steering system and ramp hoist system

suction valves, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519.

Figure 2-17. Hydraulic starting system tank and valves,

hull numbers 8500 thru 8519.

2-18
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-18. Hydraulic starting system reservoir, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

2-19
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-19. Hydraulic starting system accumulator and valve.

2-20
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-20. Hydraulic starting system accumulator and valve, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

2-21
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-21. Hydraulic starting system hand pump, hull numbers 8500 thru 8539.

2-22
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-22. Hydraulic starting system hand pump, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

2-23
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-23. Steering system valves, pump discharge,

hull numbers 8500 thru 8519. Figure 2-24. Steering system valves, cylinders, hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519.

2-24
Figure 2-25. Clutch lever and ramp hoist

pump.

Figure 2-26.1. Emergency winch controls.

(Sheet 1 of 2).

2-25
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-26.2. Emergency winch controls. (Sheet 2 of 2).

2-26
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-27. Steering system expansion tank

with sight glass, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519.

Figure 2-28. Cooing system expansion tank.

Figure 2-29. Ramp hoist hydraulic system

filters.

Figure 2-30. Steering system filter.

2-27
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-31. Engine starting instructions, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 8520 thru 8539.

2-28
TM 55-1905-217-12

STEP 1. PLACE REVERSE GEAR LEVERS IN NEUTRAL.

STEP 2. OPEN THROTTLE CONTROLS APPROXIMATELY 25 PER CENT.

STEP 3. START ENGINES ONE AT A TIME BY PUSHING STARTER BUTTON.

RELEASE BUTTON PROMPTLY WHEN ENGINE STARTS.

CAUTION: DO NOT CRANK ENGINE FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS

CONTINUOUSLY WITHOUT ALLOWING A 2-MINUTE COOLING

OFF PERIOD. IF ENGINE DOES NOT START AFTER A FEW TRIES,

STOP CRANKING AND DETERMINE THE CAUSE. CORRECT OR

REPORT CONDITION TO ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE.

STEP 4. ADJUST WATER FLOW THROUGH MUFFLERS AND BILGE PUMP

PRIMING BY POSITIONING VALVES,

STEP 5. RUN ENGINES AT PART THROTTLE AND NO-LOAD FOR 5

MINUTES--THEN RETURN THROTTLES TO IDLE POSITION.

ME 1905-217-12/2-32

Figure 2-32. Engine starting instructions, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

2-29
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-33. Engine stopping instructions, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 8520 thru 8539.

2-30
TM 55-1905-217-12

STEP 1. ENGINE REVERSE GEAR LEVERS MUST BE IN NEUTRAL

POSITION.

STEP 2. ALLOW ENGINES TO RUN AT HALF SPEED OR LOWER FOR

5 MINUTES. REGULATE SPEED WITH THROTTLE CONTROLS.

STEP 3. PULL THROTTLE CONTROLS TO CLOSED POSITION.

STEP 4. PULL THE ENGINE STOP CONTROL HANDLES OUT THE

FULL LENGTH OF THEIR TRAVEL AND HOLD THEM OUT

UNTIL THE ENGINES STOP. PUSH STOP CONTROL

HANDLES IN AFTER ENGINES STOP.

ME 1905-217-12/2-34

Figure 2-34. Engine stopping instructions, hull numbers 8540 thru 8580 thru 8618.

2-31
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-35. Landing craft operational procedures, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 8510 thru 8539.

2-32
TM 55-1905-217-12

MOVE ENGINE REVERSE GEAR LEVERS TO SHIFT INTO FORWARD OR

REVERSE AND ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROLS TO CONTROL ENGINE

SPEED.

TURN STEERING WHEEL TO CHANGE THE COURSE OF THE LANDING

CRAFT.

ME 1905-217-12/2-36

Figure 2-36. Landing craft operational procedures, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

2-33
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 2-37. Emergency tiller.

Figure 2-38. Ramp hoist hydraulic system

suction strainer, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519.

Figure 2-39. Ramp load binders and chain

hoist. 2-34

TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION II. OPERATION OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

2-7. Bilge Pumping System (fig. 1-15.1 and 2-14) a. a. 

a. Description. The bilge pumping system includes

three bilge pumps which are belt-driven from the inboard

engines, a suction manifold with nine lines to the various

bilge areas, bilge strainers and check valves, discharge

lines, and priming lines from the sea water system to the

bilge pumps. Hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618 incorporate three bilge pumps with friction type

clutches to allow manual engagement or disengagement

of the pump shaft and impeller assemblies.

b. Operation.

(1) Open the valves in the priming lines.

(2) Open bilge pump overboard discharge valve (fig.

2-15).

(3) Open bilge pump suction valves (figs.

1-15.1 and 2-14) gas needed to pump the bilge

compartments.

(4) Open bilge line valves (fig. 1-15.1 and 2-14) as

necessary to pump out the various bilge compartments.

(5) On hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618, engage clutch on applicable bilge pumps (fig. 1-

15).

2-8. Fire Extinguishers

There are four CO. fire extinguishers aboard the vessel.

On hulI numbers 8500 thru 8539, one is in the pilot

house, one in the engine compartment, and two in the

cargo well. On hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618, there is one in the pilot house, two in the

engine room, and one in the lazarette.

a. Operating Squeeze Grip CO, Extinguisher.

(1) Carry the extinguisher in an upright position and

approach the fire as closely as the heat permits.

(2) Remove the locking pin from the valve.

(3) Grasp the horn handle.

(4) Squeeze the release lever and at the same time

direct the carbon dioxide flow toward the base of the fire.

(5) Fight the fire from the windward side so the wind

will blow the heat away from the operator and at the

same time direct the carbon dioxide over the fire.

(6) In fighting fire in electrical equipment, or on a

bulkhead, direct the discharge at the bottom of the

flaming area. Move the horn slowly from side-to-side and

follow the receding flames upward.

(7) Release the lever to close the valve as soon as

conditions permit and continue to open and close the

valve as necessary.

NOTE

The valve can be opened and closed repeatedly 

without loss from leakage.

(8) When continuous operation is desired, the Dyoke ring on the carrying handle may be slipped over the

operating handle when the handle is depressed.

b. Operating Disk-Type Valve CO2 Extinguishers.

(1) Follow the instructions in a (1) and (3) above.

(2) Open the valve by turning the valve wheel to the

left; this starts the discharge of the carbon dioxide on the

fire.

(3) Follow procedures in (4), (5), and (6) above.

(4) Close the valve as soon as conditions permit and

continue to open and close the valve as necessary.

NOTE

On the disk-type valve extinguisher, the discharge of gas

may be temporarily halted by turning the valve wheel

clockwise. Do not atop the discharge too soon. When

the flame has been extinguished, coat the entire surface

involved in the fire with carbon dioxide snow. The

coating will check incandescence and prevent reflash.

2-9. Communication Equipment

Operating instructions for the communication equipment

may be found in the technical manual covering the

specific component. These manuals are listed in

Appendix A. The AN/GRC-106 or AN/SRC--32 and

AN/VRC-47 may be installed in the LCM-8 landing craft.

2-10. Navigation Equipment

a. Description. The Remote Magnetic Heading

System (RMHS) includes an induction compass

transmitter, located on the mast support, that senses the

landing craft’s heading relative to magnetic North; and a

heading indicator, located in the pilot house, that

indicates the landing craft’s heading as determined -by

the induction compass transmitter.

b. Operation. To engage the RMHS, set RMHS

COMPASS RECP switch (switch No. 6 on distribution

panel) on.

2-35
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION III. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS

2-11. Cold Weather Operation

a. Starting Aid Pressurized Cylinder (fig. 2-40).

(1) All craft use the same type starting aid.

On hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 the starting aid can be

actuated from the pilot house or in the engine room. On

hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 the

starting aid cylinders are clamped to overhead brackets

in the engine room. They must be removed from the

bracket and individually applied to prime each engine.

(2) Use the starting aid as follows:

(a) Pull out knob for one-or two-seconds (below

zero hold 3 seconds).

(b) Wait 3 seconds and then push starter button.

WARNING

Do not actuate the starting aid more than once with the

engine stopped.

OVER-LOADING THE ENGINE AIR BOX

WITH THIS HIGH VOLATILE FLUID

COULD RESULT IN A MINOR

EXPLOSION.

CAUTION

Do not crank the engine more than 30

seconds at a time when using an electric

starting motor. Always allow two minute

intervals between cranking attempts to allow

the starting motor to cool.

b. Engines.

(1) General. Keep engine compartment as warm as

possible without shutting off ventilation completely.

(2) Batteries.

(a) Keep batteries fully charged to prevent

freezing.

(b) Check specific gravity and adjust to suit

particular conditions (TM 9-6140-200-15).

(c) Check batteries for correct terminal voltage.

It may be necessary to add an additional battery to start

the engine. Disconnect additional battery, if used, as

soon as engine has started.

(3) Cooling system. Add antifreeze to engine fresh

water cooling system to prevent freezing (para 4-2).

(4) Lubricating oil system. Refer to L0551905-217-

12/3 for instructions concerning lubrication of engines

during operation in cold weather.

Figure 2-40. Starting aid.

WARNING

Never use a blow torch or other similar

means for heating fuel or lubricating oil lines.

c. Steering System. Test steering system

thoroughly by moving steering wheel from left to right.

Turn steering wheel slowly at first to loosen any ice that

may have formed between the hull and rudders at

waterline.

d. Hull and Fittings.

(1) Keep caps installed on all hose connections,

except when filling.

(2) Remove ice from ladders and passage ways on

main deck.

e. Navigating Lights and Horn. Ice may form on any

of these units and prevent proper operation. Carefully

remove ice from unit.

2-36
TM 55-1905-217-12

2-12. Hot Weather Operation

WARNING

Fuel oil and other similar materials are

highly volatile in hot weather and these

vapors increase the possibility of an

explosion. Be sure all spilled petroleum

products are wiped up. Inspect for leaks

in fuel lines and fittings. Pump bilges

regularly.

a. General. Keep engine compartment as cool as

possible by use of ventilation fans.

b. Batteries.

(1) Check electrolyte level often and fill as necessary.

(2) Keep terminals free of corrosion.

(3) Reduce specific gravity (TM 9-6140200-14).

c. Cooling System. Check water temperature gage

often. Temperature should not rise above 185°F. If this

temperature is exceeded, check for the following:

(1) Insufficient supply of fresh water in the Keel

cooling system. If so, fill expansion tank and check for

leakage.

(2) Engine coolant thermostat faulty.

Remove and inspect; replace if found faulty.

(3) Sea water (raw water) inlet clogged at sea chest.

Blow out sea chest with compressed air.

(4) Engine fresh water jump faulty. Remove and

inspect; replace if found faulty.

(5) Scale or deposits in raw water side of heat

exchanger. If present, clean heat exchanger.

d. Lubricating Oil System.

(1) Check lubricating oil pressure gage often.

Pressure will drop slightly as water temperature rises.

(2) Refer to L055-1905-217-12/3 for instructions

concerning lubrication of engines during operation in hot

weather.

2-13. Foul Weather Operation

a. Check to see that all gear and equipment is

properly stowed and secured.

b. Should the engines be operated at high speed in

rough water the engines will surge when the propellers

leave the water, causing excessive vibration. The

governor may be overworked under these conditions,

and it will be necessary for the protection of the engines

and safety of the vessel to reduce the speed of the

engines until a safe operating speed is attained as

determined by the roughness of the sea.

Change 1 2-37
TM 55-190-217-12

CHAPTER 3

OPERATOR/CREW MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION I. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS

3-1. General Lubrication Information

a. This section contains lubrication instructions

which are supplemental to, and not specifically covered

in, the lubrication orders.

b. For lubrication orders, refer to LO55-1905-217-

12/1-8.

3-2. Detailed Lubrication Information

a. General. Keep all lubricants in closed containers

and store in a clean, dry place away from external heat.

Allow no dust, dirt, or other foreign material to mix with

the lubricants. Keep all lubrication equipment clean and

ready to use.

b. Cleaning. Keep all external parts not requiring

lubrication clean of lubricants. Before lubricating the

equipment, wipe all lubrication points free of dirt and

grease. Clean all lubrication points after lubricating to

prevent accumulation of foreign matter.

c. Points of Lubrication. Service the lubrication

points at proper intervals as illustrated in current

lubrication orders.

d. OES Oil.

(1) The crankcase oil level must be checked

frequently, as oil consumption may increase.

(2) The oil may require changing more frequently

than usual because contamination by di

lution and sludge formation will increase is under cold

weather operation conditions

(3) Use special hand pump 6164884 to pump oil out

of the crankcase.

e. Engine Oil Filter Maintenance (fig 3-1 or 3-2).

(1) This is a full-flow filter with a replaceable element.

A bypass valve is located in the base to insure engine

lubrication if the filter is plugged.

(2) Change the element every time the engine oil is

changed (every 100 hours).

f. Transmission Oil Strainer (fig 3-3 or 3-4)

(1) The oil strainer is mounted in the suction line near

the transmission oil pump. The strainer contains a

cleanable element.

(2) Each time the transmission oil is changed (250

hours), remove the strainer from the suction line and

remove the element.

(3) Wash the inside and outside of the element in

clean fuel oil and blow dry with compressed air.

CAUTION

Do not use a wire brush or scrape the

screen when cleaning, thus avoiding the

possibility of damaging the wire mesh.

(4) Assemble strainer and install in suction line.

Tighten the three bolts to 1317 ft-lb. torque.

3-1
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 3-1. Engine and transmission oil filters.

3-2
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 3-2. Engine and transmission oil filter servicing.

3-3
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 3-3. Transmission oil strainer, hull numbers 8540

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

3-4
TM 55-1905-217-12

STEP 1. REMOVE THE END CAP BOLTS (3) 

AND WITH DRAW THE STRAINER 

ELEMENT.

CAUTION: DO NOT USE A WIRE BRUSH OR

METAL SCRAPER WHEN CLEAN NG

THE STRAINER. DAMAGE TO THE

WIRE MESH CAN RESULT.

STEP 2. WASH THE INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF

THE STRAINER ELEMENT IN CLEAN

FUEL OIL AND DRY WITH AIR OR

LINT FREE CLOTH.

STEP 3. ASSEMBLE THE STRAINER AND

TIGHTEN THE END CAP

ATTACHMENT BOLTS. (TORQUE TO

15+ 2 FT. LBS.) ME 1905-217-12/3-4

Figure 3-4. Transmission oil strainer servicing.

3-5
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION II. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CHECKS AND SERVICES

3-3. General

Preventive maintenance is the systematic care, servicing

and inspection of equipment. The purpose of P.M. is to

keep the equipment in serviceable condition, and to

prevent, find and repair conditions that could render the

equipment unserviceable. The vessel crew is

responsible for operator/organizational maintenance.

The engineering/deck personnel engaged in preventive

maintenance checks and services should correct any

deficiencies noted at the time of the check/inspection.

Deficiencies noted that are above the crew level of

maintenance will be reported to DS/GS level utilizing DA

Form 2407 (Maintenance Request) in accordance with

TM 38-750.

3-4. Procedures for Preventive Maintenance Checks

and Services.

The personnel performing the PMCS will utilize DA Form

2404 (Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Work

Sheet). The form will be annotated in accordance with

paragraph 3-4, figures 3-4 and 3-5, TM 38-750. The DA

Form 2404, used for recording the PMCS, will be

furnished to the appropriate supervisor for action. When

all corrected faults have been recorded on DA Form 55-

40 (Deck Department LOG), DA Form 55-44 (Engine

Depart LOG) and all uncorrected faults have been

transcribed on to DA Form 2407 (Maintenance Request),

the DA Form 2404 can be discarded unless it is required

for historical data.

3-4.1 PMCS Schedule.

PMCS will be accomplished as outlined in the enclosed

table. To ensure that the vessel is serviced and ready for

operation at all times, it will be serviced in accordance

with the intervals outlined in the PMCS Table.

a. Before Operation. The required preventive

maintenance services will be performed before operating.

Any deficiencies noted will be corrected prior to operating

the equipment.

b. During Operation. The during operation services

is a check on the vessels performance. If any

deficiencies are evidenced that will result in damage to

the equipment, operation of said equipment will be

halted.

c. After Operation. After operation services are the

basic daily preventive maintenance services.

These services will be performed at intervals based on

the normal operation of the equipment.

When abnormal conditions exist, the services will be

performed at intervals to allow for them.

d. Monthly Operation. The required monthly

services will be performed to ensure vessels stay ready

for continued operation.

e. Quarterly and Biannually Operation. These

services are accomplished on a scheduled basis, and

definite tasks are accomplished, i.e., draining and filling

equipment with oil, changing or cleaning the oil strainers

and filters, fuel filters and air filters, accomplishing minor

and some major adjustments, motor brush checks, etc.,

to ensure continued operation of vessel equipment.

Table 3-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

Landing Craft Mechanized Mod 0 and Mod 1

INTERVAL

Equipment will be reported

ITEM B D A M Q B/A Item to be inspected Procedure not ready (red) if:

1 External Hull Inspect for structural damage Watertight integrity or

(above waterline) operational capability is

impaired.

2 External Hull Crew inspect accessible hull Under water hull is

(below the waterline) areas from within the hull for

damaged/deteriorated to

flooding If crew inspection extent that water tight inreveals hull damage/flooding, tegrity is compromised.

divers will inspect underwater

hull to confirm damage.

Change 2 3-6
TM 55-1905-217-12

Table 3-1 Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services-Continued

Landing Craft Mechanized Mod 0 and Mod 1

INTERVAL

Equipment will be reported

ITEM B D A M Q B/A Item to be inspected Procedure not ready (red) if:

3 • Propeller and Pro- Check for misaligned/bent pro- Shaft is misaligned or

peller shaft peller shaft and worn cutlass bent, propeller blades are

bearings; stand on stern of vessel bent or damaged or

while running free. Should the cutlass bearing is exvibration be above normal pro- cessively worn.

peller and shaft will be inspected

by Marine divers.

4 • • • Rudders and steer- Inspect steering rams and linkage Rudder is damaged to 

existing system for normal and safe operation tent the steering is imCheck for excessive play/damage paired, to the extent that

to linkage and steering rams rudder cannot be turned

Check for air or hydraulic leaks freely through a 350° port

at pumps rams and attaching and starboard arc.

lines. Check steering system

return line filter frequently.

Change filter if indicator is in red

area.

5 · Life lines and Ensure life lines are in good Life lines are not in

stanchions repair, and are secured in 

place place/available on board

Ensure safety chains are utilized the vessel.

6 Keel coolers Marine diver inspect for damage Coolant is not evidenced

Vessel operating personnel check in expansion tank. Engine

for loss of engine coolant, and or temperatures are above

abnormal high operating engine normal Saline is evi

temperatures denced in coolant.

7 · S. W. Strainers Check strainer for mud, sediment Mufflers are leaking exand other foreign materials. En- haust fumes into engine

sure plastic cylinder, and screen room due to mechanical

are clean and in good repair. En- muffler failure-burned

sure selector handle is functional rubber boot.

8 .Anodes Inspect anodes to see if 

deterioration exist to the point that they

fail to provide adequate mass and

surface area. Maximum allowable

waste before replacement is fifty

percent. Marine diver is required

to perform this check.

9 Sea chest Ensure sea chest openings are Openings are restricted to

free of marine growth, and other a degree normal operation

foreign bodies is hampered 50% or more.

Change 2 3-6.1
TM 55-1905-217-12

INTERVAL

Equipment will be reported

ITEM B D A M Q B/A Item to be inspected Procedure not ready (red) if:

• • • Ramp Assembly` Ensure ramp will operate through Ramp is inoperative

all phases (up and down). Inspect ative/defective No oil

and replace pulleys, bushings and evidenced in sight glass

cable if defective. Replace ramp on reservoir in engine

assembly gaskets if defective room. System does not

Replace excess covers if defec- respond smoothly to all

tive Check for cracked demands.

welds/visual structural damage.

Ensure ramp locking dogs are

functional.

11 • Void covers Inspect for proper installation, Void covers missing/are

missing/defective fasteners, also not installed.

check gasket for proper seal.

12 • Bitts and chocks Inspect for damage and cracked

base welds.

13 •· • Mast and yardar Inspect for mechanical damage If mast is damaged to exand ensure lights are functional tent that apportenances

are not properly supported.

14 • · Engine room and Ensure hatches can be secured at

lazaratte hatch night to prevent tampering and

covers damage to craft, pilferage of on

board spare/BIIL items. Check

bilges for presence of oil or excessive water.

15 • Navigational lights Visually inspect to ensure that all Lights are inoperative.

lights operate properly with the Circuits are defective.

switch in the on position. Inspect

all lenses for damage and

cleanliness. Check vessels horn

for proper operation.

16 • Magnetic Check heading on two known Magnetic compass is inCompass courses Check deviation operative. Compasswill

whenever metal structural not swing freely in gimchanges are made to vessel; or bal.

when electronic equipment is added/removed. Ensure deviation

card is up to date and annual

deviation is posted. Ensure deviation card is located in immediate

vicinity of compass. Remove any

bubbles in compass bowl. Refer

to TB 55-6605-262-24 and Mfg.

manual for additional detailed information.

Change 2 3-6.2
TM 55-1905-217-12

INTERVAL

Equipment will be reported

ITEM B D A M Q B/A Item to be inspected Procedure not ready (red) if:

17 * · Communication Conduct radio check to ensure A N / U R C80 and

Equipment satisfactory operation, see corn- AN/URC92 is inAN/URC 80 (V) 1 mercial manual and TM 11-5820- operative.

AN/URC 47 820-15. Ensure TAMMS forms

and records are accomplished

IAW TM 38-750.

18 · Life Jackets Life jackets shall be inspected for There is not on board one

rips, oil stains, broken straps, life jacket for each

fiber deterioration and hull mark- passenger/crew member.

ing of vessel. See AR 56-9 and

Reg 22, CG 227.

19 Life Rings Inspect for damage and proper

marking. Ensure marker lights

function when casing is turned

upside-down.

20 Instrument:

A. Oil pressure Inspect the gauge to ensure that Gauge does not function,

gauge functions correctly. If the oil reads inaccurate Oil

pressure gauge does not indicate pressure below 27 PSI.

properly, stop the engine and investigate the cause.

1800 RPM:

Normal: 38:60 PSI

Minimum 27 PSI.

B. Ammeter The ammeter should show a high

charging rate for the first few

minutes after starting until the

generator restores to the battery

the current used in starting. After

this period the ammeter should

register a zero or slight positive

charge with lights turned off. Any

unusual fall or rise in reading will

be investigated.

C. Tachometer See that the tachometer is

operating properly and indicating

engine revolutions.

D. Coolant temper- Engine temperature should in- Temperature exceeds

ature gauge crease gradually during the warm190°F.

up period. Should high temperatures exist, caused by a defect in

the cooling system the engine

should be stopped and the trouble

investigated. Normal engine coolant temperature is 160° to 1850

F.

Change 2 3-6.3
TM 55-1905-217-12

Table 3-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services-Continued

Landing Craft Mechanized Mod 0 and Mod 1

INTERVAL

Equipment will be reported

ITEM B D A M Q B/A Item to be inspected Procedure not ready (red) if:

Batteries: Inspect the batteries to see that

they are clean, secure and not

leaking - check electrolyte level

and add distilled water if

necessary. Cables and vent caps

should be cleaned and properly

fastened. If hydrometer test indicates low charge (full charge

1.220), charge batteries immediately.

22 * * Main propulsion Ensure that engines idle and resengines pond to the controls satisfactory

by accelerating and decelerating

through full operating range,

ahead and astern. Analyze engine

performance and listen for any

unusual noise, lack of power, flat

spots engine hunting, unusual exhaust smoke, high temperatures

and loss or low fuel oil/lubriating oil pressures.

A. Engine Coolant Check level and condition of Engine temperature

coolant, ensure coolant is 1900

F on F.W. Side.

evidenced in expansion tank

sight glass (1/3 Full). During

winter months when anti-freeze is

used, run engine and make

hydrometer test and add antifreeze as necessary. Protect to at

least -300

F or as local conditions

dictate.

*·* B. Engine Use SAE 30 HD Oil. Ensure oil is Oil level is below low

Lubricating Oil level with top mark on dip stick mark on dip stick.

C. Oil Change 200 - 500 hrs or sooner if diluIntervals tion/emulsion exists. Oil testing

should be accomplished IAW

TB43-0210.

D. Lubricating Oil Change oil filters at every 500

Filters hours or sooner/at `each

lubricating oil change. Run

engine for five minutes and check

for leaks.

E. Fuel filters Change filters and clean strainer

and strainers at lubricating oil change intervals.

Change 2 3-6.4
TM 55-1905-217-12

Table 3-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services-Continued

Landing Craft Mechanized Mod 0 and Mod 1

INTERVAL

Equipment will be reported

ITEM W M A Q B/A Item to be inspected Procedure not ready (red) if:

F. Air box drains Check air box drain discharge for

excessive oil waste. If excessive

oil is present, pull covers and investigate cause.

G. Fw pump engine Inspect FW and SW pumps for Pumps are defective

proper operation and leakage. adversely affecting engine

and muffler cooling.

H. Air cleaner Check intake screen for dirt or

Engine other foreign materials. Clean air

cleaner every six months or as

local conditions dictate. Ensure

air emergency shut-down is functional.

I. Engine alarm Test to ensure alarm panel lights

panel are operational.

J. Hydraulic start- Inspect lines, valves, pump and

ing system filters for leakage. Change filter

every 2000 hours of operation.

Check operating pressure 3000 -

3200 PSI.

23 Marine gear The marine gear oil level should Oil level is below low

transmission be checked with the engine run- mark on dip stick/trans

ning (idling). The oil level should mission fails to turn

be even with the high mark on the screw.

dip stick.

A. Marine gear 1800 RPM: 180 PSI. See TM for

operating additional detailed information.

pressure:

B. Oil change Oil should be changed every 1000

intervals operating hours or sooner if dilution or emulsion exist.

24 Propeller Shaft Inspect shaft packing gland for Engine room is taking on

stuffing box excess leakage. Adjust gland with water from stuffing tube

unit running. Check gland for ex- area.

cess heat by placing hand on

gland after adjustment. Ensure

slot mounting plates are installed. Check flex hose for proper installation and deterioration.

Change 2 3-6.5
TM 55-1905-217-12

INTERVAL

Equipment will be reported

ITEM B D A Q B/A Item to be inspected Procedure not ready (red) if:

25 Bilge Pumps Check to ensure clutch engages. Clutch will not engage;

On pumps not equipped with clut- pumps fail to maintain a

ches, ensure pumps can maintain suction.

a suction by checking overboard

discharge.

26 Alternator & Check alternators for arcing and

Voltage Regulators excess play for looseness. Ensure

belts are in good repair and tension is correct. Check ammeter to

ensure regulators are functioning

correctly.

27 Fuel Tank Check fuel level in fuel tank with Fuel tank leaks.

sounding rod/tape.

28 Fire Extinguishers Inspect for corroded nozzles/

damaged hoses. Ensure seal is intact. Check weight of cylinder

monthly. Replace if discharged or

under prescribed weight.

29 Battle Lantern Ensure lantern works and bat

teries are in good repair.

30 Anchor Light Ensure cable, plug, lense and jack

staff are in good repair and functional.

31 Tools and Repair Ensure tools are accounted for

Parts on DA Form 2062 and marked

IAW para 1.8J AR 735-5. Ensure

running spares are protected

from the elements (S. W. laying in

bilges sitting on fuel tank, etc.).

Change 2 3-6.6
TM 55-1905-217-12

Table 3-2. Deleted.

SECTION III. TROUBLESHOOTING

3-5. General

a. This section contains troubleshooting information

for locating and correcting most of the operating troubles

which may develop. Each malfunction for an individual

component, unit, or system is followed by a list of tests or

inspections which will help you to determine the probable causes and corrective actions to take. You should

perform the tests/inspections and corrective actions in

the order listed.

b. This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may

occur, nor all tests or inspections and corrective actions.

If a malfunction is not listed or is not corrected by listed

corrective actions, report to higher authority.

Change 2 3-7
TM 55-1905-217-12

3-6. Troubleshooting

Refer to Table 34. This table provides troubleshooting

instructions at the operator/crew maintenance level.

NOTE

Before you use this table, be sure you have performed all

applicable operating check

Table 3-3. Troubleshooting-Operator/Crew

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE

1. ENGINE HARD TO START.

Step 1. Check the battery charge.

If charge is low, start inboard engine with hydraulic starter and start outboard engine by

engaging clutches. Check ammeters for charge rate. Tighten any loose connections

Step 2 Check for loose connections or defective starting motor switch.

Tighten connection. Replace switch if necessary.

Step 3.Check lubricating oil used

Use proper oil as specified in lubrication order.

Step 4. Check for low fuel supply.

Refill fuel tank if empty or low.

Step 5. Check for loose connection or cracked lines between fuel pump and tonir

Tighten connection or replace lines

Step 6. Check that the Injector racks are in FULL FUEL position.

Inspect for binding governor to injector linkage that will prevent the governor from positioning the injector racks into the FULL FUEL position. Remove any bind found.

2. LACK OF POWER

Check for insufficient fuel

Recheck steps 5 and 6 (1) above.

3. DETONATION.

Check if oil is picked up by air stream.

(1) Clean the air box and drain tubes to prevent accumulations that may be picked up by the

air stream and enter the engine’s cylinders.

(2) Inspect the blower oil seals by removing the air inlet housing and watching through the

blower inlet for oil radiating away from the blower rotor shaft oil seals while the engine is

running. If oil is passing through the seals, report to higher authority.

4. HIGH LUBRICATING OIL CONSUMPTION.

Step 1. Check for leaking oil lines or connections

Tighten as necessary. Report the defective parts to higher authority.

Step 2. Check for gasket or oil seal leak

Report defective gaskets or oil seals to higher authority.

5. LOW OIL PRESSURE.

Step 1. Check oil level In crankcase.

Add oil to proper level.

Step 2. Check viscosity of lubricating oil In crankcase.

Refer to lubrication order.

TORQMATIC MARINE GEAR

1. DRIVE SHAFT DOES NOT ROTATE.

Step 1. Check oil pressure

Fill to the FULL mark on the level gage

PROPELLER, PROPELLER SHAFT, AND STUFFING BOX.

1. EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE FROM STUFFING BOX.

Step 1. Check for loose or worn packing.

Adjust or replace packing (para 3-19).

2. EXCESSIVELY HOT STUFFING BOX.

Step ,1. Check if packing gland is too tight.

Adjust packing (para 3-19).

3-8
TM 55-1905-217-12

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

9. EXCESSIVE VIBRATION IN PROPELLER SHAFT.

Step 1. Check for bent or broken propeller.

Replace propeller (para 3-20).

ALTERNATOR

1. ALTERNATOR FAILS TO CHARGE.

Step 1. Check alternator belt is loose.

Adjust alternator belt (para 3-11).

Step 2. Inspect charging circuits and battery connections.

Tighten connection to make good contact.

2. LOW UNSTEADY OR EXCESSIVE CHARGING RATE.

Step 1. Check alternator and regulator connections.

Tighten as required.

Step 2. Check if alternator belt is too loose.

Adjust belt to 1/2-inch slack (para 3-1l).

3. NOISY ALTERNATORl

Step 1. Check for defective or worn bet.

Replace belt.

Step 2. Check misaligned belt or pulley.

Correct alignment.

Step 3. Check for loose pulley.

Tighten pulley.

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

1. STARTER WILL NOT CRANK ENGINE.

Step 1. Test batteries.

Recharge batteries

HYDRAULIC STARTING SYSTEM

1. ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP FAILS TO RAISE PRESSURE.

Step 1. Check fluid level.

Add oil if necessary.

2. CRANKING SPEED TOO LOW.

Step ,1. Check system fluid too heavy.

Use fluid as specified.

Step 2. Check engine crankcase oil is too heavy.

Replace oil with proper viscosity grade. Refer to lubrication order.

3. HAND PUMP FAILS TO CHARGE SYSTEM.

Step ,1. Check manual relief valve if open.

Close relief valve

Step 2. Check fluid level.

Add oil if necessary.

STEERING SYSTEM

1. STEERING WHEEL DIFFICULT TO TURN.

Step ’1. Check if both ball valves at pump discharge are open (Hulle 8500 thru 8519).

Close one ball valve.

2. STEERING IS SLOW.

Step ,1. Inspect ball valve (Hull No. 8500 thru 8519) at pump discharge.

One valve must be closed, the other open.

3. WHEEL WILL NOT TURN.

Step 1. Check rudders if Jammed or fouled.

Remove physical obstruction.

Step 2. Check one or more ball valves at cylinders are closed.

Open ball valves at cylinders (in Lazarette).

3-9
TM 55-1905-217-12

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

4. OIL TOO HOT.

Step 1. Check pump discharge valves are set properly. (Hulls 8500 thru 8519).

One discharge valve should be open and the other dosed.

RAMP HOIST HYDRAULIC SYSTEIM

1. CONTROL VALVE LEVER MOVES BUT WINCH DOES NOT TURN WHEN CABLE IS FREE TO MOVE.

Step 1. Check power takeoff (PTO) is engaged at pumps.

Engage PTO.

Step 2. Check ball valve is open

Close ball valve

2. RAMP CONTINUES TO LOWER WITH CONTROL VALVE IN NEUTRAL.

Step 1. Check ball valve is open.

Close ball valve

3. UNUSUALLY SLOW OPERATION.

Step 1. Check if ball valve is open.

Close ball valve.

Step 2. Check engines are up to speed.

Increase engine speed.

Step 3. Check only one pump is engaged.

Engage both pump

4. TANK OVERFLOWING.

Step 1. Check for aeration of oil.

Stop system and allow air to separate from oil.

BILGE PUMP SYSTEM

1. LEAK AT PACKING GLAND.

Step 1. Check packing gland is too loose or needs repacked.

Tighten or replace the gland

2. PUMP FAILS TO DELIVER WATER.

Step 1. Check suction valve is closed

Open suction valves

Step 2. Check discharge valve is closed.

Open discharge valve.

Step 3. Check whether prime is lost.

Open priming line valves.

Step 4. Check for clogged strainer

Clean strainer

Step 5. Check that clutch is engaged (Hull Nos. 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618).

Engage clutch.

8. PUMP OUTPUT IS LOW.

Step 1. Check if suction valve is partially closed.

Open valve.

SECTION IV. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

3-7. General

The maintenance procedures contained in this section

are the responsibility of the operator/ crew.

3-8. Fuel Line Strainers Mounted on Battery Support,

Used On Hull Numbers 8;500 thru 8519)

Refer to figure 3-5 and service the strainers every 8

hours.

3-9. Primary Fuel Line Strainers (Mounted on Aft

Bulkhead of Engine Room, Hull Numbers 8540 thru 8560

and 8580 thru 8618). Refer to figure 3-6 and service the

strainers every eight hours.

3-10. Engine Mounted Fuel Strainer and Fuel Filters

and Crankcase Breather Screens Dual fuel strainers

(suction) are mounted aft on each propulsion unit. Dual

fuel filters (pressure) are mounted on the side of each

engine. Refer to

3-10
TM 55-1905-217-

 Figure 3-5. Primary fuel line strainers, hull numbers 8500

thru 8519

figure 3-7 and service the strainers and filters every 8 hours.

Crankcase breather screens are mounted between the

engine blocks, and should be serviced every 8 hours.

3-11. Alternators and Belt Adjustments

There are two alternators, one mounted on the inboard

engine of each propulsion unit. The alternators are belt

driven from the crankshaft pulley. Refer to figure 3-8 for

alternator belt adjustment.

3-12. Fuses

Fuses are located in the distribution paned. The fuses are

15-amp, type AGU. Refer to figure 39 for fuse replacement.

In hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 the

fuses are 10amp, type AGU. Refer to figure 2-5 for fuse

location.

3-13. Storage Batteries, Cables, and Terminals (fig.

Fig. 3-10)

a. Inspection. Inspect batteries for leaks, corrosion,

proper electrolyte level, and breaks or cracks. Inspect

cables and terminals for corrosion and for broken cables

or terminals.

b Servicing and Testing.

(1) Clean batteries and terminals with a solution

of water and baking soda and wipe dry.

Keep batteries filled to proper level with electrolyte.

(2) Test the specific gravity of each cell with a

hydrometer. If the specific gravity reading is below 1.225

on the hydrometer, charge the battery. Specific gravity

readings of 1.260-to1.270 on the hydrometer indicate a

fully charged battery.

c. Removal.

(1) Disconnect and remove the negative lead,

then disconnect and remove the positive lead at the

battery.

(2) Remove battery.

d. Installation. Reverse procedure in c above, using

a fully-charged battery.

3-14. Hydraulic Steering System Filter

Observe the filter condition indicator (fig. 230) daily. The

filter element must be changed when the needle moves

into the red danger zone. If ·filter requires changing,

report to higher authority.

3-15. Ramp Hoist Hydraulic System Filter

Observe the filter condition indicator (fig. 2-29) daily

when system is in operation. The filter elements must be

changed when the needle moves into the red damage

zone. If servicing of filter ,is indicated, report to

organizational maintenance.

3-16. Ramp Hoist Hydraulic ’System Strainer (Hull

Numbers 8500 thru 8519)

Check indicator (fig. 2-8.1) when ramp hoist ,system is in

operation. If servicing of strainer is indicated, report to

organizational maintenance.

3-17. Bilge Pumps

The landing craft is equipped with three bilge pump. Two

pumps ate mounted on the inboard engine of the port

propulsion unit and one pump is mounted on the inboard

engine of the starboard propulsion unit. Adjust the bilge

pump belts as instructed in figure 3-11. Hull numbers

3-11
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 3-6. Primary fuel line strainers ,hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 are equipped with

pumps illustrated in figure 3-12. The belt adjustment

procedure is the same.

3-18. Sea Water Strainer

a. General. There are two sea water strainers (fig. 3-

13), one on each side of the engine room. Sea water is

used to cool the mufflers and ,is pumped by the raw (sea)

water pumps mounted aft on the engines. The strainers are

used to remove debris from the water.

b Service. Check the sea water strainers daily or at

more frequent intervals if conditions make it necessary.

Clean the strainers as instructed in figure 3-13.

3-19. Stuffing Box Adjustment (fig. 3-14)

When necessary adjust the stuffing box as follows:

a. Loosen locknut on stuffing box studs.

b. Tighten adjusting nuts on studs, while turning

propeller manually,. until seepage reaches a minimum. Be

careful to tighten adjusting nuts equally.

c. Tighten locking nuts against adjusting nuts.

d. Refer to figure 3-15 for stuffing box installation

procedures on hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8619. Adjustment procedures are as described

above.

3-20. Propeller

a. Removal.

(1) Remove propeller nut and jamnut (fig. 3-

16).

(2) Remove propeller from shaft.

b. Installation. Install propeller in reverse order of

removal. Install propeller with a light coating of graphite

and grease on the shaft taper.

3-21. Propeller ’Shaft, Strut Bearing, and Rudder

Gudgeon Bearing

a. Propeller Shaft and Strut Bearing Replacement.

(1) Disconnect negative lead at battery.

(2) Remove propeller (para 3-20).

(3) Remove strut bearing cap.

(4) Remove the 12 nuts and bolts from the

propeller to engine coupling.

(5) Remove nuts from the stuffing box bolts and

remove hose.

3-12
TM 55-1905-217-

 Figure 3-7. Engine mounted fuel strainers and fuel filters.

(6) Remove packing from the stuffing box.

(7) Remove coupling from propeller shaft.

(8) Remove propeller shaft.

(9) Install propeller shaft and strut bearing in reverse

order of removal. Replace strut bearing if worn. Install new

packing (7/16 tallowed flax). Connect negative lead at

battery.

b. Propeller Shaft Alignment.

(1) Alignment of shaft and bearings is not permanently

fixed. The alignment changes with every docking due to

changes in the keel blocking, temperature variations, and

the direction of the sun’s rays relative to the fore and aft line

of the vessel. The alignment of shafting and bearings is

affected by the temporary removal of machinery attached to

the shafting or in the vicinity of the shafting because of the

redistribution of weights and stresses. The alignment is

Figure 3-8. Adjusting alternator belts.

Figure 3-9. Location of fuses.

not the ’same when the vessel is waterborne as when it -

is in drydock. The final alignment and bolting of the main

propulsion shafting should always be done when the

vessel is waterborne.

(2) The primary purpose for providing correct alignment

is t) eliminate shaft excited vibrations and to prevent an

excessive pressure on any localized portion of the

shafting bear

3-13
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 3-10. Battery service.

3-14
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 3-11. Adjusting bilge pump belt

ing surfaces (journal bearing areas). The longitudinal line

connecting the lowest extrermities of all shafting journals

having the same diameter should form a continuousfaired line when the machinery is at operating

temperature. When the shafting is correctly aligned at

rest, the bottoms of the shaft journals should be in

contact with the bearing material. The bearing clearance

at the horizontal centerline of the journal should be

equally divided.

(3) In order to obtain and maintain acceptable

alignment, the fundamentals of longe-stablished and

good practice are as follows:

(a) Each bearing shall guide and support its

proportinate share of the shafting weight and load.

(b When shaft couplings are broken, each

overhanging shaft length will deflect from the true shaft

centerline, depending upon the amount of overhanging

shaft weight, the loading, -and the location of the bearing

supports.

(c) Alignment of sag charts have been prepared for

most vessels showing relative flange positions and the

angular slopes of shafting when the coupling ’bolts have

been removed. With the bearings adjusted to obtain

these measurements, proper alignment of the shafting is

Figure 3-12. Bilge pump installation, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8018.

3-15
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 3-13. Sea water strainer insured when the

coupling bolts are secured.

c. Methods of Determining Alignment.

(1) Running a line wire. The proper location of the

bearings on main propulsion shafting may be checked by

running a line wire. This consists of rigging supports just

clear of the end of the outer bearings of the set to be

aligned. A length of piano wire is stretched between the

supports. The supports must be rigid and not subject to

deflection when the wire is put under tension. The wire

should be attached to the supports in such a way that it

can be accurately centered in the end bearings. After the

wire has been centered in the end bearings, the wire

forms the line of reference (when corrected for sag) for

all the intervening bearings.

(2) Optical method. Alignment of shafting by the

optical method makes use of the ,line of

Figure 3-14. Stuffing box adjustment, hull numbers 8500

thru 8519 and 8520 thru 85S9.

sight, which for all practical purposes is a true line. This

method consists of boring a large hole in the ends of two

boards. One board is fitted at each end bearing of the set

to be aligned. A small hole (about 1/16-to 1/8-inch) is

drilled in two pieces of thin sheet metal. The sheet metal

is placed on the boards and the small holes are adjusted

so that they are aligned with the center of the end

bearings. A light is placed behind the board on one end

and observed through the hole in the board at the other

end. The intermediate boards are adjusted so that the

light can be seen through all the holes. The center of

these holes serves to establish the reference line.

(3) Flange method. When it is suspected that the shaft is

out of alignment, it should be checked by slacking the

coupling bolts at a coupling near the suspected area on

the shaft. Feelers are inserted between the coupling

flanges, and if there is a greater distance between the

faces at one part of the coupling than at another, the

shafts are out of alignment at these places.

3-16
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 3-15. Stuffing box installation, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

3-17
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 3-16. Propeller and propeller shaft

SECTION V. FIELD EXPEDIENT REPAIRS

3-22. General

Operator and/or crew maintenance troubles may

occur while the landing craft is being operated where

supplies and repair parts are not available and normal

corrective action cannot be performed. When the

condition exists, expedient repairs in paragraphs 3-19

through 3-28 may be used in emergencies.

Equipment so repaired must be removed from

operation as soon as possible and properly repaired

before being placed in operation again.

3-23. Loss of Fuel

Trouble Expedient

remedy

Fuel line cracked ---------------Tape cracked line until

defective line can be

replaced.

Defective element --------------Remove element and

operate (stopping flow

of fuel) equipment until

a new element can be

installed.

3-24. Engine Heats Up

Trouble Expedient

remedy

’Thermostat defective -------Remove defective

thermostat (closed)

and operate unit until

a serviceable thermostat

can be installed (para 4-

4).

3-25. Loss of Lubricating Oil

Trouble Expedient

Lubricating oil filter line Plug line and close filter

rebroke turn line valve until oil lie can be replaced.

3-26. Loss of Electrical Power

Trouble Expedient

. Wire broken in electrical Strip and splice ends

of wire system. Tape splice and continue

operations until spliced line can be replaced

3-18
TM 55-1905-217-12

3-27. Broken Drive Belts

Trouble Expedient

remedy

 Alternator inoperative. Bilge Replace drive belts.

pump inoperative.

3-28. Emergency Clutch Engagement

Trouble Expedient

remedy

Transmission cannot be Engage emergency

engageengaged hydraulically. ment bolts (para 4-

70

3-19
TM 55-1905-217-12

CHAPTER 4

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION I. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIAL

4-1. General

The services performed upon receipt of a new or used

vessel are the responsibility of the using organization and

will be performed by the crew and issuing activity.

WARNING

The hand-operated fire extinguishers must be

aboard and operative before volatile materials are

brought aboard, electrical circuits are energized, fuel

tanks are filled, and engines started.

4-2. Inspecting and Servicing the Equipment

The crew and issuing activity personnel will inspect the

vessel for completeness. Any evidence

of leaks, damage, or missing components or parts will be

listed at once and reported to the proper authority for

corrective action. During the inspection the crew will

perform the daily preventive maintenance services listed

in paragraph 3-4. Refer to TB-750-651 for cooling

system requirements.

4-3. Used Equipment

A vessel received from storage will be inspected as

specified in paragraph 4-2. However, storage ,personnel

will have performed the depreservation operation and

outfitted and operated the vessel prior to the arrival of the

crew.

SECTION II. MOVEMENT TO A NEW WORKSITE

4-4. Dismantling for Movement

a. The landing craft estimated total weight is

134,400 lbs. On hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618, the estimated hoisting weight is 130,946

pounds. Landing craft with these hull numbers contain

an additional lifting eye located on each side of the stern.

Eyestraps with a link are welded to the hull at two

positions on each side of the cargo well and a wire rope

sling with a thimble and four sockets is stored in the

lazarette. Attach the sling sockets to the links for lifting

the craft from the water.

b. Before the landing craft is lifted the following

operations must be performed:

(1) Close the fuel supply and return valves for

both fuel tanks (valves are in engine room).

(2) Close the hydraulic steering suction ,valve

at tank in engine room (hull numbers 8500 thru 8519).

(3) Close the ramp hoist hydraulic system

suction valve at tank in engine room (hull numbers 8500

thru 8519).

(4) Close the hydraulic starting system suction

valve at tank in engine room (hull numbers 8500 thru

8519).

(5) Disconnect ground cable from battery (in

engine room).

(6) Close the valves at both accumulators.

(7) Close the hatches.

(8) Disconnect electrical connector and remove

for mast (5, fig. 4-1), main mast (9), and stern mast (6)

and store them in, the lazarette.

4-5. Reinstallation after Movement

a. Use the wire rope sling described in paragraph

4-4 to lower the landing craft into the water.

b. Perform the procedures described in paragraph

4-4b in reverse order.

c. Follow procedures described in paragraph 4-2

before operating the craft.

d. The equipment listed in Appendix B is to be

installed as specified after movement.

4-1
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-1. Lazarette equipment stowage, hull number 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

 4-2
1. Starboard fuel tanks 4. Ramp emergency hoist 7. Hand bilge pump 11. Fuel 2. Fire extinguisher (2) 8. Spare propeller (port) 12. Pails 3. Spare propeller 5. Foremast stowage 9. Main mast

(starboard) 6. Stern mast stowage 10. Port fuel tank

Figure 4-1 - Continued4-3
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION III. REPAIR PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS,

AND EQUIPMENT

4-6. Tools and Equipment

Tools and equipment are contained in Appendixes B&C

and are authorized TO&E units to which LCM-8’s are

assigned.

4-7. Special Tools and Equipment

Repair parts and special tools are listed and illustrated in

TM 5-1905-217-20P and in Appendix C of this manual. Special tools required for

organizational maintenance are listed in table 4-1.

References and illustrations indicating the use of the

tools are also listed. The five digit number below the part

number is the Federal supply code number for the

manufacturer of the tools.

4-4
Table 4-1. Special Tools

FSN or Reference Use

Item Part Number Fig. Para.Gage: Cylinder compression test set JB19-08 4-8 4-20 Compression te

 (33287)

Wrench: Torque, 1/2 in. Drive 0-200 J1264 Torque fittings  ft. lb. (33287)Gage, Thickness: valve lash J9708 4-9 4-21 Adjust valve

 (33287)

Remover: Injector and spring compressor J1227-01 4-14 4-28 Remove injecto

 (33287)

Repair kit: Injector service J1241-04 4-15 4-28 Service and cle

 (33287)

Toot set: Injector tube service J6286-01 4-15 4-28 Repair and clea

 (33287)

Fixture: Injector assembly J6868-01 4-16 4-28 Injector holder

 (33287)

Wire: Spray tip cleaner .006 in. (HV7) J21461 4-16 4-28 Clean injector t

 (33287)

Gage: Injector timing 1.484 in (HV7) J1853 4-16 4-28 Timing fuel inje

 (33287)

Wrench: Fuel line fittings J8932-01 4-17 4-29 Install and torqu

 (33287)

Gage, Gap: Governor spring 0.170 J5407 4-33 4-31 Adjust governo

 (33287)

Wrench: Fuel and water pump and J4242 4-47 4-19 Fuel and water governor (33287) 4-20 4-40 removal

4-39 4-44

Hose assembly: Accumulator charging TSE8600 4-52 4-60 Charge accumu

 (01843)

Gage assembly: Accumulator charging TSE8601 4-62 4-60 Charge accumu

 (01843)

Pump, Hand: Lube oil 5164334 3-2 3-1 Remove oil form 

 (72582)

Wrench: Filling cap diesel oil NS5501-1387636 4-12 4-26 Remove filling c

 (80064)

4-5
TM 5-190-21 7-12

4-8. Maintenance Repair Parts

Repair parts and equipment are listed and illustrated in TM 6-1905-217-20P.

SECTION IV. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS

4-9. General

This section describes how organizational maintenance

personnel are to lubricate the LCM4, MOD 1. For

lubrication orders refer to paragraph 3-1 of this manual.

4-10. Detailed Lubrication Information

a. Transmission Oil Fitter (fig. 3-1 or fig. 3-2).

(1) This is a full-flow filter similar to the engine

oil filter but a smaller size.

(2) Change the filter element every time the

transmission oil is changed (250 hours).

b. Ramp Cable Sheaves (fig. 4-2). Lubrication of

the ramp cable sheaves is accomplished thru grease

fittings located on the outer ramp door panels.

Automotive and artillery grease, MIL-G-10924, is applied

by the hand-operated grease gun.

4-6
TM 55-1905-217-12

ME 1905-217-12/4-2

Figure 4-2. Ramp cable sheaf details; hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

SECTION V. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CHECKS AND SERVICES

4-11. General

To insure that the landing craft is ready for operation at

all times, it must be inspected systematically so that

defects may -be discovered and corrected before they

result in serious damage or failure. The preventive

maintenance checks and services to be performed are

listed as described

in paragraph 4-12. The item numbers indicate the

sequence of minimum inspection requirements. Defects

discovered during operation of the unit will be noted for -

future correction, to be made as soon as operation has

eased. Stop operation immediately if a deficiency is

noted during operation which would damage the

equipment if operation were continued. All de-

 4-7
TM 55-1905-217-12

ficienies and shortcomings will be recorded together with

the corrective action taken on DA Form 2404 (Equipment

Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet) at the earliest

possible opportunity.

4-12. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

This paragraph contains a tabulated listing of preventive

maintenance checks and services. Refer to Table 4-2.

Table 4-2. Organizational Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

Q - Quarterly

Total man-hours required: 10.1

Work

Sequence ITEM TO BE INSPECTED Time

Number PROCEDURE (M/H)

SECTION I - FUELS

1 FUEL FILTERS

 Replace filter elements (para 3-10) (fig. 3-7). 0.2

SECTION II -- Steering

2 STEERING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SUCTION SCREENS

Drain oil in tank and clean screens (para 4-77). 0.5

SECTION III - RAMP

3 RAMP HOIST SYSTEM SUCTION STRAINERS AND SCREENS

 Service strainer on hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 when indicator is red. On hull num

 bers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618, drain oil and clean screws every 200 hours

(para 4-87) 0.5

SECTION IV - Power Take-off

4 POWER TAKE-OFF CLUTCH, RAMP SYSTEM PUMPS

 Check for proper operation, adjust if necessary (fig. 4-78) (para 4-88). 0.2

SECTION V - Engine

5 ALTERNATORS

 Clean brushes and brush holder Replace brushes if they extend less than 1/4 in. 0.9

 beyond brush holder (para 4-48). 0.2

6 GOVERNOR

 Inspect for loose, worn, or binding linkage. Check to see that governor is securely 0.1

 mounted and in good operating condition (para 4-30).

7 FILTER--HYDRAULIC STARTING SYSTEM

 Change filter element at 6-month interval (para 3-14) (fig. 4-51). 0.4

8 ENGINES

 At 6-month intervals, check valve clearance and adjust if necessary. Perform com- 2.1

 pression test on each engine (para 4-20, 4-21). 4.0

9 RAMP LOCKING MECHANISM, FOR HULL NUMBERS 8540 THRU 8660 AND

8680 THRU 8118.

 Lubricate all fittings monthly (fig. 4-81). 1.0

SECTION VI. TROUBLESHOOTING

4-13. General

a. This section contains troubleshooting information

for locating and correcting most of the operating troubles

which may develop in the LCM-8. Each malfunction for

an individual component, unit, or system is followed by a

list of tests or inspections which will help you to

determine the probable causes and corrective actions to take. You should perform the tests/inspections

and corrective actions in the order listed.

b. This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may

occur, nor all tests or inspections and corrective action.

If a malfunction is not listed or is not corrected by listed

corrective actions, notify higher authority.

4-8
TM 55-1905-217-12

4-14. Troubleshooting NOTE

Refer to Table 4-3. This table provides trouble- Before you use this table, be are you have peshooting instructions for the organizational formed all applicable operating checks.

maintenance level.

Table 4-3. Troubleshooting - Organizational

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINES

1. HARD STARTING

Step 1. Check fuel pump relief valve to determine if properly seated.

Test fuel flow as follows:

(1) Disconnect fuel return tube and hold open end of the tube in a suitable receptacle.

(2) Start and run engine at 1,200 rpm and measure fuel flow from return tube for one

minute. It should be at least 1/2 gallon.

(3) Be sure all tube connections between the fuel supply and the pump are tight so that no

air will be drawn into the fuel system; then immerse the end of the fuel tube into the fuel In

the container. Air bubbles rising to the surface of the fuel will indicate a leak on the suction

side of the pump. If flow is inadequate replace pump (para 4-29).

Step 2. Check for defective starting motor.

Inspect brushes, replace if worn (para 4-48).

2. UNEVEN RUNNING OR FREQUENT STALLING

Step 1. Check for low coolant temperature.

The thermostat may not be closing. Remove, inspect, and test the thermostat. Install a new

thermostat if necessary. Check the thermostat seal. Replace it if necessary (para 4-44).

Step 2. Test for insufficient fuel flow.

Test fuel flow (1. above).

Step 3. Check for faulty injectors.

Check injector timing (para 4-28) and the position of the fuel racks (para 4-1).

Step 4. Check for governor instability.

Engine hunting may be caused by binding governor-to injector linkage or by faulty adjust

ment Refer to paragraphs 4-30 and 4-41.

3. LACK OF POWER

Step 1. Check for insufficient air.

Remove air box covers and inspect the cylinder liner ports. If port are over 50 percent plugged, clean them. Check compression pressures (para 4-20).

Step 2. Check for insufficient fuel.

Test fuel flow (1. above).

4. DETONATION

Step ,1. See if oil is picked up air stream.

Check for a defective blower-to-cylinder block gasket. Replace the gasket if necessary. If

the blower has been removed, install a new gasket. Refer to direct or general support.

Step 2. Check for low coolant temperature.

The thermostat may not be closing. Remove, inspect, and test the thermostat. Install a new

thermostat if necessary. Check the thermostat seal. Replace it if necessary (para 4-44).

Step 3. Check for faulty injectors.

Check injector timing (para 4-28) and the position of each injector rack (para 4-30). Check

injectors (para 4-28) for spray tip holes enlarged or broken spray tip. Replace all injectors

found faulty.

5. HIGH LUBRICATING OIL CONSUMPTION

Step 1. Check for leaking oil cooler core.

Check the engine coolant for lubricating oil contamination. If contaminated, replace

the oil cooler core (para 4-25).

6. LOW OIL PRESSURE

Step 1. See if oil cooler is clogged.

A plugged oil cooler is indicated by an excessively high lubricating oil temperature. Remove

and clean the oil cooler core (para 4-25).

4-9
TM 55-1905-217-12

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Step 2. Check cooler by-pass valve.

Remove the by-pass valve and clean the valve and valve seat and inspect. Replace the

defective parts (para 4-25).

Step 3. Check gag

Install a serviceable gage (para 4-19).

7. HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE

Step 1. Inspect cooling system.

Clean the cooling system and thoroughly flush to remove scale deposits (para 4-41).

Step 2. Check circulation.

Inspect for collapsed or disintegrated hoses Replace all faulty hose Thermostats may be

inoperative. Remove, inspect, and test the thermostat; replace it if found faulty (para 4-44).

Check the water pump for a loose or damaged impeller. Check for an air leak on the suction

side of the water pump Replace defective parts (para 4-68).

TORQUEMATIC MARINE GEAR

1. LOW OIL PRESSURE

Step 1. Check the pressure gage (para 4-68).

Replace if faulty.

Step 2. Check the lubricating oil

Check the oil temperature and if found to be abnormally high, remove and clean, both internally and externally, the marine gear oil cooler. Replace the cooler if necessary (para 4-25).

Clean the oil strainer with fuel oil and replace (fig. 3-3. Replace the oil filter element (fig.

3-1 or fig. 4-2).

Step 3. Check for oil leaks in pump suction lines

Inspect the pump suction lines, strainer cap and gaskets for air leaks. Repair or replace

leaking liner and fittings (para 4-88).

ALTERNATOR

1. ALTERNATOR FAILS TO CHARGE

Step 1. Check for worn or defective brushes

Replace brushes (para 4-48).

Step 2. Check regulator.

Replace regulator (para 4-49).

2. LOW OR UNSTEADY CHARGING RATE

Step .1. Check for worn, sticky, or intermittent brush contact,

Replace brushes (para 4-48).

step 2. Check regulator.

Replace regulator (para 4-49).

3. EXCESSIVE CHARGING RATE

Step 1. Check regulator.

Replace regulator (para 4-49).

4. NOISY ALTERNATOR

Step 1. Check for worn bearings

Replace alternator (para 4-48).

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

1. STARTER WILL NOT CRANK ENGINE

Step 1. Check for loose connection or defective wiring.

Replace damaged wiring and tighten all connections to the starter, magnetic switch, and batteries (para 4-47).

Step 2. Check for defective witch.

Inspect all switches to determine their condition. Connect a jumper lead around any switch

suspected of being defective. If system functions, replace the bypassed switch (para 4-47).

Step 3. Check commutator to determine if dirty or worn.

Inspect commutator by removing inspection plugs. If commutator is dirty or lightly grooved,

polish it by placing a strip of No. 00 sandpaper around the commutator and under brushes

(rough side toward commutator) and rotate the armature Blow the dust from the commutator after polishing (para 4-47).

4-10
TM 55-1905-217-12

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Step 4. Check if starter brushes are worn.

Replace brushes (para 4-80).

HYDRAULIC STARTING SYSTEM

1. ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP FAILS TO RAISE PRESSURE

Step 1. Check for air in system.

Purge system (para 4-58).

Step 2. Check if filter is plugged.

Replace filter element (para 4-69).

Step 3. Check if check valves are functioning properly.

Open the relief valve on the side of the hand pump, while the engine is running, to permit

the engine driven pump to wash the check valves free from particles. If the accumulator

can be charged with the hand pump but not with the engine driven pump, then a check

valve in the engine pump is defective. Replace the faulty check valve assembly (para 4-67).

2. CRANKING SPEED TOO LOW

Step 1. Check if control valve is fully open.

Check control valve, replace if necessary (paras 4-64 and 4-65).

Step 2. Check if inlet line is restricted.

Check lines for foreign matter (para 4-81).

3. LOSS OF FLUID FROM RESERVOIR

Step 1. Check for external leaks.

With pressure in system check air hoses and fittings for leaks. Tighten and replace defective

part

Step 2. Check for internal leaks.

Check level of oil in reduction gears. A leaking seal in the hydrostarter will allow hydraulic fluid from the starter system to enter the reduction gear case. Replace starter,

drain transmission oil, and flush. Replace filter and fill with clean oil.

4. LOSS OF FLUID PRESSURE WHEN ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING

Step ,1. Check for external leakage in system.

Examine all hoses and fittings for leaks. Tighten or replace fittings and any defective parts

(para 4-57).

5. HAND PUMP FAILS TO CHARGE SYSTEM

Step 1. Check if check valves are leaking.

If caused by dirt, open relief valve (maximum of one (1) turn), and operate hand

pump slowly for a few minutes to wash particles out of check valves. If this is successful, clean ball seats in pump body and replace balls and springs if necessary (para 4-81).

Step 2. Check if suction line is plugged. Remove line and clean (para 4-60).

6. LOSS OF ACCUMULATOR PRECHARGE (NITROGEN)

Step 1. Check air valve.

Release pressure in system by opening relief valve on hand pump. Then depress air

valve to release remaining precharge before attempting to remove valve from acoumulator. Replace air valve (para 4-60).

Step 2. Check safety fuse.

Replace safety fuse and holder gaskets (para 4-60).

7. HIGH PRESSURE IN SYSTEM (3500 PSI OR ABOVE)

Step 1. Check gage.

Replace gage (para 4-57).

8. FLUID EMERGES FROM RESERVOIR FILLER CAP WHEN HYDRAULIC STARTER IS USED

Step 1. Check for excessive fluid in reservoir.

Check fluid level after the accumulator is discharged. The fluid level should be approximately 2 1/2 in. from the top of the filling tube (para 4-57).

Step 2. Check if filter in filler cap is dirty.

Clean with fuel oil and blow dry (para 4-57).

STEERING SYSTEM

1. STEERING WHEEL DIFFICULT TO TURN

Step 1. Check if relief valve is stuck open.

Readjust relief valve (para 4-80) or (para 4-81).

4-11
TM 55-1905-217-12

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Step 2. Check setting of overcenter valve.

Reset overcenter valve (para 4-80).

Step 3. Check setting of counterbalance valves (Gunderson, Craft, and Rohr).

Reset counterbalance valves (para 4-81).

2. STEERING IS SLOW

Step 1. Inspect flow control valve.

Disassemble and clean valve. Repair or replace (para 4-81).

3. KICK BACK IN HELM

Step 1. Check for air in system.

Bleed air from system. Correct air leak and refill (para 4-82).

Step 2. Check for restriction in lines.

Clean lines (para 4-82).

Step 3. Check for air in system, low oil level.

Bleed air from system. Correct air leak and refill (para 4-82).

Step 4. Check overcenter valve or counterbalance.

Adjust or replace valve (para 4-80 or para 4-81).

4. WHEEL TURNS BUT RUDDER DOES NOT

Step 1. Check for ruptured line.

Replace ruptured line (para 4-82).

Step 2. Check for air in system.

Bleed air from system’ Correct air leaks and refill (para 4-82).

5. NOISY OPERATION OF PUMPS

Step 1. Check for air in system

Bleed air from system. Correct air leak and refill (para 4-81).

6. OIL TOO HOT

Step 1. Check action of flow control valve.

Disassemble, inspect, and clean or replace valve (para 4-80 or para 4-81).

7. OVERFLOWING OF TANK

Step 1. Check for aeration of oil by air leaks in system.

Shut down system, allow air to escape. Repair air leak (para 4-81).

8. LOSS OF OIL

Step 1. Check for ruptured line

Repair ruptured line (para 4-81).

RAMP HOIST HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

1. CONTROL VALVE LEVER DOES NOT MOVE

Step 1. Check control valve.

Replace control valve (para 4-89).

2. CONTROL VALVE LEVER MOVES BUT WINCH DOES NOT TURN WHEN CABLE IS FREE TO MOVE

Step 1. Check hydraulic oil or system pressure.

Check quantity of oil in supply tank. Replenish if necessary (para 449).

Step 2. Check for ruptured hydraulic line.

Replace line (para 4-89).

Step 3. Check system relief valve to see if it is set at correct pressure (para 4-89).

Check system pressure. Adjust relief valve if required (para 4-89 or 4-90).

Step 4. Check foreign material in system.

Flush system completely and clean filter and strainer (para 4-87).

Step 5. Check counterbalance valve to see if it is correctly adjusted (hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 8540

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618).

Adjust counterbalance valve (para 4-96).

3. BRAKE DOES NOT RELEASE

Step 1. Check insufficient operating pressure.

If pressure is adequate (300 psi for hull numbers 8500 thru 8519, or 2,100 psi for hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 .thru 8518), check counterbalance valve setting (hull numbers 8500 thru 8519, and 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (para 4-96).

Step 2. Check for foreign material in system.

Flush system completely and clean strainer and filter (para 4-86).

4-12
TM 55-1905-217-12

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

4. RAMP CONTINUES TO LOWER WITH CONTROL VALVE IN NEUTRAL

Step 1. Cheek counterbalance valve.

Adjust counterbalance valve. See paragraph 4-94 or 4-96.

5. UNUSUALLY SLOW OPERATION

Step 1. Check pump or motor.

Replace defective component (para 4-93).

Step 2. Check for restriction in line.

Clear lines (para 4-93).

Step 3. Check relief valve setting to see if it is set too low (para 4-93).

Adjust relief valve See paragraph 4-93.

6. NOISY OPERATION OF PUMP

Step 1. Check for air in system.

Purge air from system (para 4-86).

7. EXCESSIVE HEAT BUILDUP IN SYSTEM

Step 1. Check to see if relief valve is leaking at high pressure.

Adjust relief valve. See paragraph 4-93.

8. LOSS OF OIL

Step 1. Check for ruptured line

Replace line.

Step 2. Check ramp locking system two-way valve for external or internal leakage (hull numbers 8540

thru 8566 and 8580 thru 8618).

Tighten connections and replace defective parts (para 4-97).

SECTION VII. RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION

4-15. General Methods Used to Attain Proper

Suppression

Essentially, suppression is attained by providing a low

resistance path to ground for the stray currents. The

methods used include shielding wires, grounding the

frame with bonding straps, and using capacitors and

resistors.

4-16. Radio Interference Suppression Components

a. Primary Suppression Components. The primary

suppression components are those whose primary

function is ’to suppress radio interference. These

components are identified in figure 4-3.

b. Secondary Suppression Components. These

components have radio interference suppression

functions which are incidental or secondary to their

primary function.

4-17. Replacement of Suppression Components

Refer to figure 4-3 and replace the radio interference

suppression components.

4-18. Testing of Radio Interference Suppression

Components

Test the capacitors for leaks and shorts on a capacitor

tester; replace defective capacitors. If test equipment is

not available and interference is indicated, isolate the

cause of interference by the trial-and-error method of

replacing each capacitor in turn until the cause of

interference is located and eliminated.

Figure 4-3. Interference suppression components.

SECTION VIII. ENGINES

4-19. General (fig. 4-4 and fig. 4-5)

a. Description. Model 12005A (starboard) and

12006A (,port) twin units each consist of

two six-cylinder diesel engines in a side-by-side

arrangement coupled to a transfer gear and mounted on

a steel base.

4-13
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-4. Inboard view of port propulsion unit.

b. Engine Arrangement. Model 12005A is built for

starboard installation. The two engines of this model are

right-hand rotation engines, designated as RB and RD,

and furnish clockwise propeller shaft rotation. Model

12006A is built for port installation. The two engines of

this model are left-hand rotation engines, designated as

LB and LD, and furnish counterclockwise propeller shaft

rotation (fig. 4-6). Figure 4-7 illustrates the crankshaft

rotation and accessory arrangement of the engines used

in each unit. These views also show the direction of

rotation of all gears in the train, as well as location of

water-and exhaust-manifolds.

4-20. Engine Compression Test

a. Remove the valve rocker cover for the engine to

be tested.

b. Start the engine and run it at approximately onehalf rated load until normal operating temperature is

reached.

c. With the engine stopped, remove the fuel pipes

from the injector and fuel connectors for the No. 1

cylinder.

d. Remove the injector from No. 1 cylinder and

install an adapter and the pressure gage, J1319-03, in its

place as shown in figure 4-8.

e. Use one of the two fuel pipes as a jumper

connection between the fuel inlet and return manifold to

permit fuel to flow directly to the return manifold.

f. Start the engine and run it at 600 rpm. Observe

and record the compression pressure indicated on the

gage.

g. Perform the compression pressure check on

each cylinder. The compression pressure in any one.

cylinder should not be less than 390 psi at 600 rpm when

engine is operated at sea level. In addition, the variation

in compression pressure between cylinders of the engine

must not exceed 25 psi at 600 rpm.

h. Low compression pressure may result from any

one of several causes:

(1) Piston rings may be stuck or broken.

(2) Compression may be leaking past the

cylinder head gasket, the valve seats, the injector tubes,

or through a hole in the piston.

4-14
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-5. Outboard View of port propulsion unit.

4-21. Exhaust Valve Clearance Adjustment

a. General. The correct exhaust valve clearance at

normal engine operating temperature is important for

smooth, efficient operation of the engine. Whenever the

cylinder head is overhauled, the exhaust valves are

reconditioned or replaced, or the valve operating

mechanism is replaced or disturbed in any way, the valve

clearance must first be adjusted to the cold setting to

allow for normal expansion of the engine parts during the

engine warm-up period. This will insure a valve setting

that is close enough to the specified clearance to prevent

damage to the valves when the engine is started.

b. Exhaust Valve Clearance Adjustment (Cold

Engine).

(1) Place the governor throttle control lever in

the NO-FUEL position. Pull engine stop control out.

(2) Rotate the crankshaft until the injector

follower is fully depressed on the cylinder to be adjusted.

(3) Loosen the push rod locknut.

(4) Place a 0.013 inch feeler gage, tool J9708,

between the valve stem and the rocker

arm (fig. 4-9). Adjust the push rod to obtain a smooth

"pull" on the feeler gage.

(5) Remove the feeler gage. Hold the push rod

with 5/16-inch wrench and tighten the locknut with a 1/2-

inch wrench.

(6) Recheck the clearance. At this time, if the

adjustment is correct, the 0.011 inch feeler gage, J9708,

will pass freely between the valve stem and the rocker

arm, but the 0.013 inch feeler gage will not pass through.

(7) Check and adjust the remaining valves in

the same manner as outlined above.

c. Exhaust Valve Clearance Adjustment (Hot

Engine).

(1) Maintaining the normal engine operating

temperature -is particularly important when making the

final valve clearance adjustment. If the engine is allowed

to cool off before setting any of the valves, the clearance

when running at full load may become insufficient.

(2) With the engine at normal operating

temperature (160°-185° F.), recheck the exhaust valve

clearance with feeler gage J9708. At this time, if the

valve clearance is correct, the 0.008-inch feeler gage will

pass freely between

4-15
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-6. Engine arrangement

the valve stem and the rocker arm, but the 0.010-inch

gage will not pass through

4-22. Exhaust Manifold and Pipe (fig. 4-10)

The one-piece, water-cooled exhaust manifold is cast

with an integral water jacket surrounding the exhaust

manifold and is discharged from the forward end through

a tube into the lower section of the expansion tank. A

drain cock is installed in the bottom of the manifold for

draining the water jacket. A plug is provided in the

bottom of the exhaust outlet elbow for draining moisture

condensed from the exhaust gases. Inspect for cracked

or worn hoses, and replace if necessary. Inspect studs

for damage and check gaskets for leaks.

a. Removal. Refer to fig. 4-10 and remove the

exhaust pipe and manifold.

b. Cleaning Inspection and Repair.

(1) Clean parts with cleaning solvent FED.

SPEC. PD-680 and dry thoroughly.

(2) Inspect the pipe for signs of deterioration

and wear.

(3) Inspect the manifolds for leaks, cracks,

corrosion, and other damage.

(4) Replace all defective parts as required.

c. Installation. Refer to fig. 4-10, position the

exhaust pipe and manifold on the engine, and secure

with mounting hardware.

Figure 4-7. Crankshaft rotation and accessory arrangement as viewed from flywheel end.

4-16
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-8. Checking compression pressure.

Figure 4-9. Valve clearance adjustment.

Figure 4-10. Exhaust manifold and pipe removal and

installation

SECTION IX. ENGINE LUBRICATING SYSTEM

4-23. General

a. Engine lubricating oil is circulated by a gear-type

pump gear driven from the crankshaft. All the oil leaving

the pump is forced through ’the full-flow oi4 filter to the

cooler and then into the oil gallery in the cylinder block

from

where it is distributed to the various engine ,bearings.

The drain from the cylinder head and ’other engine parts

leads back to the oil pan.

b. If the oil cooler should become clogged, the oil

will flow from the pump through a spring loaded bypass

valve directly into the oil gallery.

4-17
TM 55-1905-217-12

c. Stabilized lubricating oil pressure is maintained

within the engine at all speeds, regardless of the oil

temperature, by means of a regulator valve located

between the pump outlet and the inlet to the cylinder

block. When the oil pressure at the valve exceeds 50

pounds per square inch, the regulator valve opens and

remains open until the pressure is less than -the opening

pressure.

4-24. Engine Oil Filter

a. Description. This is a full-flow filter with a

replaceable element. A bypass valve, which opens at 15

psi, is located in the base.

b. Service. The element must be changed at every

oil change interval (100 hours). See figures 3-1 and 3-2.

c. Removal and Installation. Disconnect hoses,

then remove the filter from the bracket. Install in reverse

order of removal.

4-25. Engine Oil Cooler (fig. 4-11)

a. General. The oil cooler is located on the side of

the engine just below the water pump. To assure engine

lubrication if the oil cooler becomes clogged, a bypass

valve located at the oil inlet to the cooler bypasses oil

around the cooler directly to the oil gallery in the cylinder

block. The core through which the oil passes while being

cooled is sealed to prevent a coolant from getting into the

oil. Whenever an oil cooler is assembled, special care

must be taken to have the proper gaskets in place and

the retaining bolts tight.

Figure 4-11. Engine oil cooler.

b. Removal.

(1) Drain cooling system.

(2) Remove coolant inlet pipe and outlet elbow.

(3) Remove oil cooler housing and the two

elements.

c. Inspection of Oil Cooler.

(1) Inspect the housing for damage, and

replace as necessary.

(2) Inspect the two elements for excessive

sludge buildup and damage, and replace as necessary.

SECTION X. ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM

4-26. General

The fuel system (fig. 1-18 or 4-12) consists of the fuel

tanks (2) and lines, fuel strainers (mounted aft on each

propulsion unit), fuel pumps (driven from the blower

lower rotor shaft), fuel filters (mounted on the side of

each engine), fuel manifolds, and fuel injectors. Hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519 have an additional fuel strainer

for each propulsion unit. These strainers are mounted

on the battery box. Hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and

8580 thru 8618 incorporate a 2-psi relief valve in the

return line. Additionally, these hull numbers include a

primary fuel strainer mounted on the aft bulkhead of the

engine room in the supply line from each reservoir (fig.

1-17). These hull numbers also incorporate a fuel

pressure switch interlocked

with the hydrostarters to prevent accidental engagement

of the hydrostarter when the engine is running. Hulls

8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 have fuel oil heat

exchangers installed in the raw water cooling system.

4-27. Engine Mounted Fuel Strainers and Fuel

Filters

Refer to paragraph 3-10 and figure 3-7 for daily service.

Every 500 hours clean strainer elements and replace

filter elements as follows:

a. Fuel Strainers (fig. 3-7).

(1) Disassembly.

(a) Drain strainer body.

(b) Remove handle locknut and handle.

(c) Remove four nuts and washers from

clamping ring studs. Remove case and clamping

4-18
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-12. Fuel system diagram.

ring together (do not remove clamping ring from case).

Care must be taken not to lose or damage case gasket.

(d) Loosen stuffing box nut.

(e) Unscrew element and knife assembly

by turning right (left-4and thread) until it is free.

(2) Inspection and service.

(a) Inspect edge of cleaning knife for

wear.

(b) Inspect element for wear caused by

cleaning knives or damage which will allow dirt to pass

through the filtering screen.

(c) Submerge element assembly in fuel oil

and wash with soft lint-free cloth or soft hair brush. Do

not use wire brush or scraper. Exercise care not to allow

dirt to enter inside of element.

(d) Reassemble strainer assembly and

place in service.

b. Fuel Filters. With engine stopped, loosen top

retaining bolt and remove filter shells and elements.

Wash shells in clean fuel and discard

old elements and gaskets. Using new elements of the

type and number specified on shell and the new gaskets

provided in the element cage, reassemble the filters.

With engine running, check for leaks.

c. Primary Fuel Strainer (hull numbers 8540 thru

8560 and 8580 thru 8618). Refer to figure 84 for strainer

servicing instructions.

4-28. Fuel Injectors

a. Description. Fuel injectors are installed as

shown in figure 4-18. They are mounted in the cylinder

head with their spray tips projecting slightly below the top

of the inside surface of the combustion chambers.

b. Removal (fig. 4-14).

(1) Remove the valve rocker cover.

(2) Remove the fuel pipes from both the

injector and the fuel connectors.

(3) Install clean shipping caps on the injector

fuel inlet and outlet and on the fuel connectors..

4-19
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-13. Fuel injector mounting.

(4) Crank the engine to bring the outer ends of

the push rods of the injector and valve rocker arms in line

horizontally.

(5) Remove the two rocker shaft bracket bolts

and swing the rocker arms away from the injector and

valves.

(6) Remove the injector clamp bolt, special

washer, and clamp.

(7) Loosen the inner and outer adjusting

screws on the injector rack control lever and slide the

lever away from the injector.

(8) Lift the injector from its seat in the cylinder

head as shown in figure 4-14. Use special tool J1227-

01.

(9) Cover the injector hole in the cylinder ,head

to keep foreign material out.

c. Cleaning.

(1) Clean the exterior of the injector with ,fuel

oil and dry it with compressed air.

(2) Before installing an injector in an engine,

remove the carbon deposits from the bevelled seat of the

injector tube in the cylinder head. This will assure correct

alignment of the

4-20

TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-14. Removing injector from cylinder head.

injector and prevent any undue stresses from being

exerted against the spray tip.

d. Installation.

(1) Refer to figure 4-13 and insert the injector into

the injector tube with the dowel registering with the

locating hole in the cylinder head.

(2) Slide the rack control lever over so that it

registers with the injector rack.

(3) Place the injector clamp in place and install the

special washer. Install the bolt and tighten it to 20-25 ft-lb

torque. Make sure that the lamp does not interfere with

the exhaust valve or injector springs.

NOTE

Check the injector control rack for free movement.

Excess torque can cause the control rack to stick or

bind.

(4) Move the rocker arm assembly into position and

tighten the rocker arm bracket bolts to 90-100 ft-lb

torque.

(5) Remove the shipping caps. Then, install the fuel

pipes and connect them to the injectors and the fuel

connectors. Tighten the connections to 12-15 ft-lb torque.

CAUTION

Do not bend the fuel pipes and do not exceed

the specified torque. Excessive tightening

will twist or fracture the flared end of the fuel

line and result in leaks. Lubricating oil diluted

by fuel oil can cause serious damage to the

engine bearings.

(6) After installing the injectors in the engine,

perform a complete engine tune-up. However, if only one

injector has been removed and replaced and the other

injectors and the governor adjustment have not been

disturbed, it will only be necessary to adjust the valve

clearance and time the injector for the one cylinder, and

to position the injector rack control levers. Refer to

paragraph 431 to position the rack control levers.

e Timing the Injector (fig. 4-16).

(1) Pull the engine stop control out to the NOFUEL position.

(2) Rotate the crankshaft until the exhaust

valves are fully depressed on the cylinder to be timed.

(3) Place the small end of the injector timing

gage J1853 (for HV7 injector) in the hole [provided in the

top of the injector body, with the flat of the gage toward

the injector follower.

See figure 4-16.

(4) Loosen the push rod locknut.

(5) Turn the push rod and adjust the injector

rocker arm until the extended part of the gage will just

pass over the top of the injector follower.

(6) Hold the push rod and tighten the locknut.

Check the adjustment and, if necessary, readjust the

pushrod.

Figure 4-16. Timing fuel injector.

4-21
TM 55-190-217-12

(7) Refer to paragraph 4-31 and make injector rack

control adjustment.

4-29. Fuel Pump (fig. 4-17)

a. General.

(1) The positive displacement gear-type fuel

pump transfers the fuel from the supply tank to the fuel

injectors. The pump circulates an excess supply of fuel

through the injectors which purges the air from the

system and cools the injectors. The unused portion of

fuel returns to the fuel tank by means of a ,fuel return

manifold and fuel return line.

(2) The pump is attached to the rear end plate

cover of the blower assembly with three bolt and seal

assemblies. The seals are flat, soft copper washers

which prevent the oil in the blower cover from seeping

out around the bolt threads. The pump is driven off the

end of the blower lower rotor by means of a drive

coupling fork attached to the end of the pump drive shaft

and mating with a drive disc attached to the blower rotor.

(3) Fuel pumps are furnished in left-hand or

right-hand rotation, according to the engine model, and

are stamped, "LH IN" or "RH IN". The left hand -pumps

are used on LB-RB engines while the right-hand pumps

are used on LD-RD engines. These pumps are not

interchangeable, nor can a pump made for one rotation

be rebuilt for the other rotation since the relief valve can

be installed in only one position in the pump body.

b. Removal.

(1) Disconnect the fuel lines from the inlet and

outlet openings at fuel pump.

(2) Disconnect the drain tube from the fuel

pump.

(3) Remove the three pump attaching bolt and

seal assemblies, using wrench J4242, and withdraw the

pump from the blower.

(4) Check the drive coupling fork, and, if broken

or worn, replace it with a new coupling.

c. Installation (fig. 4-17). The left-hand pump is

used on "B" engines and the right-hand pump is used on

"D" engines. The pumps are not interchangeable. The

pump must always be installed with the inlet opening in

the pump cover (marked "LH IN" or "RH IN") on the side

toward the cylinder block. Install the pump as follows: 

(1) Affix a new gasket to the pump body

mounting flange and locate the pump drive coupling fork

over the squared end of the drive shaft with prongs of

fork directed away from the pump.

(2) Place the fuel pump assembly up against

the blower with the prongs of drive coupling fork in

registration with slots in drive disc on the blower rotor

shaft.

(3) Secure the pump to the )lower, with three

bolt and seal washer assemblies.

(4) Connect the inlet and outlet fuel tubes to the

fuel pump.

(5) Connect the drain tube to the fuel pump

body.

4-30. Governor

a General.

Each governor has an identification plate located on the

control housing, containing the governor assembly

number type-,

Figure 4-17. Fuel pump.

4-22
idle-range rpm, and drive ratio. The maximum engine

speed, not shown on the identification plate, is stamped

on the option plate attached to the valve rocker cover.

b. Checking Governor Operation.

(1) Governor difficulties are -usually indicated

by speed variations of the engine; however, it does not

necessarily mean that all such speed fluctuations are

caused by the governor. Therefore, when improper

speed variations appear, the engine should be checked.

(2) Check the engine to be sure all cylinders

are firing. If any cylinder is not firing, replace the injector

(para 4-28).

(3) Check for bind that may exist in the

governor operating mechanism or in the linkage between

the governor and the control tube. With the fuel rod

connected to the injector control tube lever, the

mechanism should be free from bind throughout the

entire travel of the injector racks. If friction exists in the

mechanism, it may be located and corrected as follows: 

(a) If an injector rack sticks or moves too hard, it

may he due to the injector hold-down clamp being too

tight or improperly positioned. To correct this condition,

loosen the injector clamp, reposition, and tighten to 20-

25 ft-lb torque.

(b) A binding injector may result from internal dirt

accumulation, defective plunger and bushing, or a bent

injector rack. A defective injector must be replaced.

(c) An injector rack may bind as the result of an

improperly positioned rack control lever. Loosen the

control rack adjusting screws.

If this relieves the bind, relocate the lever on the control

tube and position the rack as outlined in paragraph 4-1.

(d) The injector control tube may bind in its support

brackets, thus preventing -free movement of the injector

racks to their no-fuel position due to tension of the return

spring. This condition may be corrected by loosening and

realining the control tube supporting brackets. If the

control tube support brackets were loosened, realined

and tightened, the injector racks must be repositioned as

outlined in paragraph 4-31.

(e) A bent injector control tube return spring may

cause friction in the operation of the injector control tube.

If the spring has been bent or otherwise distorted, install

a new spring. Check for bind at the pin which connects

the fuel rod to the injector control tube lever; replace the

pin if necessary.

(4) If, after making the preceding checks, the

governor fails to control the engine properly, the governor

should be removed and reconditioned.

c Removing the Governor (fig. 4-18, 4-19, and 4-20).

(1) Disconnect the linkage attached to the

governor control levers.

(2) Remove the breather tube.

(3) Remove four screws and lockwashers and

lift the governor cover and gasket from the governor

housing.

(4) Refer to figure 4-20 and disconnect the fuel

rod from the differential lever.

(5) Remove the four bolts and the separate

cover from the weight housing.

’(6) Remove two governor-to-cylinder head

bolts.

(7) Move the upper end of the control housing

away from the cylinder head and free the lower end from

the weight housing.

(8) Use tool J4242, to remove the six governor

weight housing-to-blower bolts; then withdraw the

housing from the blower.

d Installing the Governor.

(1) Affix anew gasket to the governor weight

housing. Start the splined end of the weight shaft in the

upper blower rotor and position the housing against the

blower end plate.

Figure 4-18. Removing the governor.

4-23
TM 55-190-217-12

NOTE: PORT ENGINE INSTALLATION SHOWN.

ME 1905-217-12/4-19

Figure 4-19. Removing the governor, hull number 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

(

 (2) Place a new copper gasket on each weight

housing to-blower bolt and thread the bolts into the

blower end plate, finger tight only.

(3) Place a new gasket over the dowels and the

side of the weight housing facing the (4)

Move the thrust ’bearing assembly and rise toward

the weight end of the shaft.

(5) Position the lower end of the control

housing over the dowel pins in the weight housing.

NOTE

The finished surface of the operating fork must

be placed against ’the outer side of the thrust

bearing.

(6) Affix a new gasket to the governor control

housing; then attach the governor control housing to the

cylinder head with two bolts. Tighten the bolts.

4-24
TM 55-190-217-12

1. Idle speed adjusting 13. High speed spring 27. Weight housing cover

screw retainer cover 28. Riser thrust bearing

2 High speed spring 14. Speed control lever 29. Governor riser

plunge 15. Throttle shaft lever 30. Weight housing

8. High speed spring 16. Cam 31. Weight carrier

4. Low speed spring seat 17. Fuel rod 82 Weight shaft assembly

5. Low speed spring cap 18. Locknut 33. Weight assembly

6. Low speed spring 19. Gap adjusting screw 34. Operating shaft fork

7. Buffer screw 20. Operating shaft bearing 36. Governor control housing

8. Locknut 21. Operating shaft 36. Operating shaft lever

9. Retainer locknut 22. Operating shaft busing 37. Differential lever

10. High speed spring 23. Gasket 38. Governor cover

retainer 24. Weight housing plug 39. Lockwasher

11. Locknut 25. Retaining bolt 40. Screw

12. Bolt 26. Shaft end bearing

Figure 4-20. Governor components.

(7) Tighten the governor-to-blower bolts with

wrench J42/-2.

(8) Affix a new gasket to the weight housing

cover. Place the cover in position and install four bolts

with lockwashers.

(9) Connect the oil tube to the fitting on the

cover.

(10) Refer to figure 4-20 and position the fuel rod

over the differential lever pin. Place a flat washer over the

pin and secure it with the retainer.

4-25
TM 55-1905-217-12

(11) Attach the fuel rod to the injector control

tube lever with a pin and cotter pin.

(12) Place a new gasket on the governor control

housing and mount the governor cover on the housing

with the pin on the throttle shaft registering with the

machined slot in the differential lever.

(13) Install the four cover screws with

lockwashers.

(14) Connect throttle linkage.

(15) Attach the breather tube to the governor

housing.

(16) Adjust the governor and position the injector

rack control levers as instructed in paragraph 4-31.

4-31. Governor and Injector Rack Control

Adjustments

a. Governor Gap Adjustment. With the engine at

operating temperature, adjust the governor gap as

follows:

(1) With the engine stopped, remove the two

attaching bolts and withdraw the governor high speed

spring retainer cover (13, fig. 4-20).

(2) Back out the buffer screw (7) until it extends

approximately 5/8 inch from the locknut.

(3) Start the engine and ,loosen the idle speed

adjusting screw locknut and adjust the idle screw (1) to

obtain the desired idle speed.

Hold the screw and tighten the locknut to retain the

adjustment. The recommended idle speed is 550 rpm.

(4) Stop the engine and remove the governor

cover and lever assembly.

(5) Remove the valve rocker cover.

(6) Remove the fuel rod (17) from the

differential lever and the injector control tube lever.

(7) Check the gap between the low speed

spring cap and the high speed spring plunger with gage

(0.170 in.) J5407 as shown in figure

(8) If required, loosen the locknut and turn the

gap adjusting screw until a slight drag is felt on the gage.

(9) Hold the adjusting screw and tighten the

locknut.

(10) Recheck the gap and readjust if necessary.

(11) Install the fuel rod between the governor

and injector control tube lever.

(12) Install the governor cover and lever

assembly.

Figure 4-21. Adjusting Gap.

b. Positioning Injector Rack Control Levers.

The position of the injector racks must be correctly set in

relation to the governor. Their position determines the

amount of fuel injected into each cylinder and ensures

equal distribution of the load. Adjust the No. 1 injector

rack control lever (fig. 4-22) first to establish a guide for

adjusting the remaining injector rack control levers.

(1) Disconnect any linkage attached to the

governor speed control lever.

(2) Loosen the idle speed adjusting screw

locknut (fig. 4-20) and back out the idle speed adjusting

screw until 1/2 inch of the threads project from the

locknut %-hen the nut is against the high speed plunger.

(3) Loosen all of the inner and outer injector

rack control lever adjusting screws. Be sure all of the

control levers are free on the injector control tube.

(4) Move the governor speed control lever to

the maximum speed position as shown in figure 4-22.

Hold the lever in that position with light finger pressure.

Turn the inner adjusting screw on the No. 1 injector rack

control lever down until a slight movement of the control

tube is observed or a step up in effort is noted. This will

place the No. 1 injector rack in the full-fuel position. Turn

the outer adjusting screw down until it bottoms lightly on

the injector control tube. Then, alternately tighten both

the inner and outer adjusting screws.

4-26
TM 55-190-217-12

1. Control lever adjusting 5.Injector rack control 

screw (inner) lever

2. Control lever adjusting 6.Cam screw (outer)

3. Injector control tube 7.Throttle shaft lever

4. Fuel rod 8.Lock nut lever

9. Buffer screw

10.Speedcontrol lever

Figure 4-22. Positioning No. 1 injector rack control lever.

NOTE

The above step should result in placing the governor

linkage and control tube assembly in the same

position that they will attain while the engine is

running at full load.

(5) To be sure the control lever is properly

adjusted, hold the speed control lever in the maximum

speed position and press down on the injector rack with a

screw driver or finger tip and note "rotating" movement of

the injector control rack (fig. 423) when the speed control

lever is in the maximum speed position. Hold the speed

control lever in the maximum speed position and using a

screw driver, press downward on the injector control

rack. The rack should tilt downward (fig. 4-24) and when

the pressure of the screw driver is released, the control

rack should "spring" back upward.

(6) If the rack does not return to its original

position, it is too loose. To correct this condition, back off

the outer adjusting screw slightly and tighten the inner

adjusting screw slightly.

(7) The setting is too tight if, when moving the

speed control lever from the idle to the maximum speed

position, the injector rack becomes tight before the

speed control lever reaches the end of its travel (as

determined by 

Figure 4-23. Checking rotating movement of injector

control rack.

Figure 4-24. Check injector control rack "spring".

the stop under the governor cover). This will result in a

step up in effort required to move the speed control lever

to the end of its travel. To correct this condition, back off

the inner adjusting screw slightly and tighten the outer

adjusting screw slightly.

4-27
TM 55-1905-217-12

(8) Disconnect the fuel rod from the injector

control tube and manually hold the No. 1 injector in the

full-fuel position and turn down the inner adjusting screw

of the No. 2 injector until the injector rack has moved into

the full-fuel position and the inner adjusting screw is

bottomed on the injector control tube. Turn the outer

adjusting screw down until it bottoms lightly on the

injector control tube. Then, alternately tighten both the

inner and outer adjusting screws.

(9) Recheck the No. 1 injector rack to be sure

that it has remained snug on the ball end of the injector

rack control lever while adjusting the No. 2 injector. If the

rack of the No. 1 injector has become loose, back off

slightly on the inner adjusting screw on the No. 2 injector

track control lever and tighten the outer adjusting screw.

When the settings are correct, the racks of both injectors

must be snug on the ball end of their respective rack

control levers.

(10) Position the remaining injector rack control

levels as outlined in steps 8 and 9.

(11) Connect the fuel rod to the injector control

tube lever.

(12) Turn the ’idle speed adjusting screw until it

projects 3/8-inch beyond the locknut. Tighten the

locknut.

c . Adjusting Maximum No-Load Engine Speed.

All governors are properly adjusted before leaving the

factory. However, if the governor has been reconditioned

or replaced, and to ensure the engine speed will not

exceed the recommended no-load speed as given on the

option plate, the maximum no-load speed may be set as

follows:

(1) Loosen the locknut (fig. 4-25) and back off

the high speed spring retainer approximately five turns.

(2) With the engine at operating temperature

and no-load on the engine, place the speed control ,lever

in the full-fuel position. T-urn the high speed spring

retainer IN until the engine is operating at the

recommended no-load speed.

(3) Hold the high speed spring retainer and

tighten the locknut.

d Adjusting Idle Speed. With the maximum noload speed properly adjusted, adjust the idle speed as

follows:

(1) Remove the spring housing to uncover ’the

idle speed adjusting screw.

(2) With the engine at normal operating

temperature and with the buffer screw (fig. 426) backed

out to avoid contact with the differential lever, turn the

idle speed adjusting screw

 Figure 4-25. Adjusting maximum no-load speed.

until the engine is operating at approximately 15 rpm

below the recommended idle speed. The recommended

idle speed is 550 rpm.

(3) Hold the idle screw and tighten the locknut.

(4) Install the high speed spring retainer and

retain with the two bolts.

e. Adjusting Buffer Screw. With the idle speed set,

adjust the buffer screw as follows:

(1) With the engine running at normal operating

temperature, turn the buffer screw (fig. 4-26) in so that it

contacts the differential lever as lightly as possible and

still eliminates "engine roll".

NOTE

Do not increase the engine idle speed more than

115 rpm with the buffer screw.

(2) Hold the buffer screw and tighten the

locknut.

(3) Recheck the maximum no-load speed. If it

has increased more than 25 rpm, back off the buffer

screw until the increase is less than 2-5 rpm.

432. Engine Throttle Controls

a. Each propulsion unit consists of two engines

connected by clutches to a common gear box. The

throttle adjustment is made so that each engine of a twin

unit will carry its share of the load.

4-28
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-26. Adjusting engine idle speed.

b The throttle linkage may be adjusted after 

(1) With engines stopped, set the throttle setting the

valves, timing the injectors, adjusting the governor and

the injector operating linkage as follows (fig. 4-27).

control cross shaft (15, fig. 4-27) so that throttle control

levers (17) are in a vertical position as shown at "A-A".

(2) With engines stopped, adjust turnbuckles

(13 fig. 4-27) on the two throttle control rods so that pins

in the throttle control levers at governor cover rest

against the shoulders of the control cams (8) in the

"IDLE" position at the two governors.

(3) Now move master throttle (16) to "FULL"

open position, at which setting the pin in throttle lever

(24) at both governors should just strike the extreme end

of the slot in the cam (8) at the "RUN" position. If either

or both pins do not reach end of slot in cams, adjust

turnbuckles (13) to bring about this condition. The linkage

must be so adjusted that the pins in the throttle ,levers at

governor covers reach "RUN" position in the control cam

at exactly the same time. Do not put any strain in the

throttle linkage when making this adjustment.

(4) Start and warm up both engines to

operating temperature. Move master throttle to "IDLE"

position. Declutch both engines and set idling speed of

each engine to 500 rpm.

NOTE

Engine may be brought up to operating

temperature by declutching engines and setting throttle to

approximately 1,200 engine Wpm.

If quick warm-up is attempted by burning the propeller,

the ship must be securely tied to the clock with no loose

lines or floating obstructions to foul the propeller.

(5) Set governor no-load top speed. Usually the

top no-load speed is set the same on both governors of

twin units before the engines leave the factory. If check

as outlined below shows top no-load speeds to be

different on the two governors, correct as follows: 

(a) With both engines warmed up, stop engines and

disconnect throttle control rod (11, fig. 4-27) for "B"

engine by removing pin at clevis (14).

(b) Start "D" engine, declutch and move master

throttle to "FULL" open position.

(c) Note and record maximum no-load speed as

indicated by tachometer.

(d) Stop engine and connect throttle control tube for

"B" engine and disconnect "D" engine.

(e) Start "B" engine, declutch, and with master

throttle in "FULL" open position, note and record speed.

(f) If no-load speeds of the two engines are not the

same, increase the speed of low engine by adding shims

(5) between the high speed spring (4, fig. 4-27) and the

spring plunger (3). To add shims, remove low-speed

adjusting screw cover (1), back out nut (2), and place

shims -between inner end of spring and shoulder on

plunger. Add one shim at a time and check speed after

each shim is added.

(6) Synchronize engine speeds at no-load.

Speeds of the two engines must be synchonized to

obtain, as nearly as possible, the same no-load speeds in

the range just below the rated load speed by ’adjusting

the linkage to each governor. Thus, a unit rated at 1,850

rpm should have the engines synchronized at 1,700-

1,800 rpm. Synchronize as follows:

(a) with engines warmed up, declutch both engines

and move master throttle to such ,position that speed of

"B" engine is 1,750 rpm as -recorded by the tachometer.

Lock the master throttle in this position.

(b) Note speed of the "D" engine. If the speeds of

the two engines are not the same, loosen the two

locknuts at turnbuckle on the ’"D" engine, and by

adjusting turnbuckle, shorten throttle rod to increase or

lengthen to decrease engine speed.

(c) Unlock and move master throttle to "FULL" open

position. In the "FULL" open position, without strain on

the throttle linkage, the

4-29
TM 55-1905-217-12

1.Low speed adjusting 4. High speed spring 9.Govenor control lever 13. Throttle control rod

screw cover 5. Shims 10.Govenor control link turnbluckle

2. High speed spring 6. Low speed spring gaps (for '”D”)" engine) 14. Throttle control rod

retaining nut 7. Govenor 11. Throttle control rod clevis

3.Spring plunger 8. Control Cam 12.Throttle control rod 15. Throttle control cross

locknut shaft

Figure 4-27. Throttle control adjustment dfagram.

4-30
TM 55-1905 217-12

16. Master lever 19. Throttle control to 21. Injector control tube 24. Governor throttle control

17. Throttle control lever governor link lever lever

18. Throttle control support 20. Governor control link 22. Injector

bracket (for "B" engine)

23. Injector rack control tube

Figure 4-7 -- Continued

pins in throttle control levers (24, fig. 4-27) at the

governor covers of both engines should be within 1/16-

inch of the same distance from the end of the slot in cam.

If the levers are not within this limit, the chances are that

the governor gaps or the injector rack adjustments are

not identical on the two engines and should be

rechecked. The governor with the pin closest to the end

of the cam slot may have a "close" gap or the governor

with the pin farthest from the end of the cam slot may

have the injector racks too "tight". If adjustments are

necessary, recheck engine speeds after making

adjustments.

4-33. Propulsion Unit Controls (Hull Numbers 8540

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618)

a. Throttle Control. Each propulsion unit consists of

two engines connected by the power transfer unit. The

propulsion unit is controlled by a single throttle control

from the pilot house or from the engine room. Individual

engines are controlled by individual throttle levers located

on each propulsion unit. figure 2-8.1 illustrates the

locations of the controls on the port propulsion unit. The

throttle adjustment is made after setting the valves (para

3-21), timing the injectors (para 4-28), adjusting the

governor (para 4-31), and adjusting the injector operating

linkage (para 4-31). The propulsion unit throttle control is

inter-locked with the reverse-gear control lever to prevent

engagement or disengagement of the clutch until the

throttle has been -placed in the idle speed position.

Adjust throttle linkage by the procedure listed below. Key

numbers refer to figure 2-8.1 unless otherwise noted.

(1) Disconnect pilot house throttle control by

pulling out the manual disconnect pin (16) and twisting 90

degrees.

(2) With engines stopped, set throttle control

cross shaft (5) so that the individual engine throttle levers

(8) are in a vertical position.

NOTE

The propulsion throttle control lever (,17) must

maintain an approximate 30 degrees above

horizontal position when in idle position.

(3) Loosen lever (14) and lever (10) and

disconnect rod (‘9) from lever (10). Adjust so that rod (9)

forms and approximate 90 degree angle with both levers.

Secure levers (14 and 10) to the shafts and place rod (,9)

into appropriate hole in lever (10) to maintain 90 degree

angle.

Secure rod.

(4) Adjust turnbuckles (2 and 11) so that the

pins in the governor throttle control levers (15, fig. 4-20)

contact the shoulders of the slot in the control cams (16)

in the idle position.

(5) Move propulsion unit control lever (17) to

the full-open position. The pins in the governor throttle

control levers (15) should just contact the extreme end of

the slot in each control cam (16). If the pins do not

contact the end of the slots, readjust the turnbuckles (2,

11). The linkage must be adjusted so that the governor

throttle control lever pins on both governors reach the run

position of each cam at the same time.

(6) Engage pilot house throttle control by

pulling out disconnect pin (16) and turning 90 degrees.

(7) Place pilot house throttle control (15, 16, fig. 2-3) 

an idle position. Adjust turnbuckles (6) to ensure

engine room propulsion unit throttle control (17) is in

similar position.

(8) Check that pins in the governor throttle

control levers (15) are contacting the shoulder of the cam

control slot in the idle position.

NOTE

Do not force linkage or put any strain on throttle

linkage when making this adjustment.

(9) If pins are not contacting the idle shoulder,

adjust turnbuckles (6) until proper relationship is

obtained.

(10) Move pilot house propulsion unit throttle

control (15, 16, fig. 2-3) to full-pen position. Repeat step

(6) above.

(11) Start and warmup both engines to operating

temperatures.

4-31
TM 55-1905-217-12

NOTE

Engine may be brought up to operating temperature by

declutching engines and setting throttle to approximately

1,200 engine rpm. If quick warmup is attempted by

turning the propeller, ,the ship must be securely tied to

the dock with no loose lines or floating obstruction to foul

the propeller.

(12) Disengage one engine throttle control (8)

from cross shaft (5) by pulling upward on the lever. Set

idle speed of engine to 550 rpm (para 4-31).

(13) Repeat step (12) for other engine.

(14) Set governor no-load top speed.

(a) With both engines warmed up, stop engines and

disconnect throttle control rod (4) for outboard engine by

removing bolt (1).

(b) Start inboard engine, declutch and move pilot

house throttle control to FULL OPEN position.

(c) Note and record maximum no-load speed as

indicated by tachometer.

(d) Stop engine and connect throttle control tube for

outboard engine ’and disconnect inboard engine by

removing bolt (13).

(e) Start outboard engine, declutch, and with pilot

house throttle control in FULLOPEN position, note and

record speed.

(f) If no-load speeds of the two engines are not the

same, increase the low engine by loosening the lock nut

(11, fig. 4-20) and turning the high speed spring retainer

(10) in until the engine is operating at the desired no-load

speed.

(g) (connect throttle control rod (12) for inboard

engine.

(15) Synchronize engine speeds at no-load.

Speeds of the two engines within one propulsion unit

must be synchronized to obtain, as nearly as possible,

the same no-load speeds in the range just below the

rated load speed by adjusting the linkage to each

governor. Synchronize as follows:

(a) With engines warmed up declutch both engines

and move the pilot house throttle control to such position

that speed of the inboard engine is 1,750 rpm as

indicated by the tachometer. lock the throttle in this

position.

(b) Note speed of the outboard engine.

If the speeds of the two engines are not the same, loosen

the ,locknuts at turnbuckle on the outboard engine, and

by adjusting turnbuckle, shorten throttle rod to decrease

or lengthen to increase engine speed.

(c) Unlock and move pilot house throttle control to

FULL-OPEN position. In the full open position, without

strain on the throttle link

age, the pins in the throttle control levers (15) at the

governor covers of both engines should be within 1/16-

inch of the same distance from the end of the slot in cam.

If the levers are not within this limit, the governor gaps or

the injector rack adjustments are not identical on the two

engines and should be rechecked (para 4-81).

If adjustments are necessary, repeat steps (14) and (15)

above after making adjustments.

b. Reverse Gear Control (fig. 4-28). A single control

lever is provided in the pilot house and in the engine

room for reverse gear control of each propulsion unit.

The reverse gear control is interlocked with the throttle

control to prevent engagement or disengagement of the

clutch except when propulsion unit is at idle rpm. Control

of individual engine reverse gears is provided by a

shutoff valve (18) for controlling the flow of oil to each

engine. The valves are normally in a vertical (ON)

position. The reverse gear control linkage is adjusted as

follows (-engine stopped):

CAUTION

If a shutoff valve is placed in an off position,

lock it in that position to prevent vibration

from moving it to a vertical (ON) position.

(1) Disengage pilot house control lever (14 and

17, fig. 2-3) by pulling out manual disconnect pin (22) and

turning 90 degrees.

(2) Place engine room control lever (24) into

forward position. Using turnbuckle, adjust rod (23) to

insure lever (20) is contacting forward stop.

(3) Place engine room control lever (24) into

reverse position. Insure lever (20) is just contacting

reverse stop. Adjust turnbuckle and ’rod (23) if required.

(4) Place engine room control lever (24) into

neutral position. Insure lever (20) is in neutral position.

(5) Repeat steps (2), (3), and (4) until lever (20)

is in correct position in relation to control lever (24).

(6) Engage pilot house control lever by pulling

out manual disconnect -pin (22) and turning 90 degrees.

(7) Place pilot house control in forward position

and adjust turnbuckles (25) to obtain proper position of

engine room control (21).

(8) Repeat step (7) for reverse and neutral

positions.

4-32
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-28. Pilot house engine control, hull number 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

4-34. Pilot House Engine Control System (Hull

Number 4500 thru 85’19)

a. General. Hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 are

equipped with a model MD engine control system which

consists of a pilot house control head, terminal blocks,

elbows, engine control unit, conduit, and cable as shown

in figure 4-29. The twin engine control is designed to

allow the operator to control both propulsion units with

one hand. Clutch action occurs in the first 30° of the

travel each side of neutral, while the remaining 600 of

travel provides governor control from idle-to-full ahead or

astern. Separate neutral throttle controls and separate

stop controls for each engine are located on the pilot

house control panel.

b. Maintenance.

(1) Bearings in the pilot house control head and

cable elbows have sealed ball bearings and re lubricated

for life. Terminal block sheaves

are of nylon and require no lubrication.

(2) The engine control unit (in engine room)

should be lubricated once a year in normal service. A

grease fitting is provided. The exposed chain should be

painted with grease twice a year. No other maintenance

is required.

4-35. Pilot House Engine Control System (Hull

Numbers 8520 thru 8539)

a. General. Hull numbers 8520 thru 8569 have a

separate model MK control system for each propulsion

unit. Each control system consists of a pilot house control

head and two push-,pull cables. One cable is for shift

control and the other for throttle control. The control head

lever operates both cables in proper sequence as shown

in figure 4-30. A neutral throttle lever is provided on each

control head. If control from the engine room is

necessary, the cables can be disconnected by using the

quick disconnects shown in figure 4-31.

4-33
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-29. Pilot house engine control system, hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519.

b Adjustments.

(1) Operate the control hand lever several

times. The control head lever detent positions and the

transmission shift lever detent must coincide exactly at

the neutral position. Adjust the clutch cable terminal at

the engine as required to synchronize the detent position.

(2) Under no conditions should the operation of

the control head hand lever cause the

Figure 4-30. Pilot house engine control, hull number

8520 the 8519.

Figure 4-31. Engine controls quick disconnects, hull

num8520 thru 8539.

engine clutch lever to jam against its limit stops at either

forward or reverse. Otherwise, the control head hand

lever will bind and be difficult to move through the

forward and reverse throttle ranges.

(3) To adjust operating tension, remove the

nameplate on top of the control head, pry out red plug,

and turn adjustment screw. Turning screw to the right

increases operating tension.

4-34

TM 55-1905-217-12

4-36. Air Silencer

a. General.

(1) The air silencer is attached to the air

intake side of the blower rotor housing. A perforated

sheet metal partition divides the silencer into two

sections. The inner portion forms an air duct the entire

length of the silencer. Air enters this duct from both ends

and flows toward the outlet opening at the center and

then into the blower. The outer portion is filled with

sound absorbent, flameproof, felted-cotton waste.

(2) An air intake (blower) screen is used

between the air silencer and the blower housing to

prevent foreign objects from entering the blower.

b. Removal.

(1) Remove the bolt that retains the breather

pipe to the air silencer.

(2) While supporting the silencer, remove the

six attaching bolts and washers. Then remove the

silencer and air intake screen from the blower.

c. Cleaning. Clean or replace the air intake screen

(fig. 4-32).

d. Installation. Install the screen and silencer in

reverse order of removal.

4-37. Blower

a. General. The blower supplies the fresh air

needed for combustion and scavenging. Its operation is

similar to that of a gear-type oil pump. Two hollow threelobe rotors revolve with very close clearances in a

housing bolted to the cylinder block. To provide

continuous and uniform displacement of air, the rotor

lobes are made with a helical (spiral) form.

Figure 4-32. Blower air inlet silencer assembly.

b. Inspection. The blower may be inspected for

any of the following conditions without being removed

from the engine. However, the air inlet silencer must be

removed. Refer to higher echelon if inspection indicates

that blower repair is required.

CAUTION

When inspecting a blower on an engine with the engine

running, keep fingers and clothing away from the moving

parts of the blower and run the engine at low speeds

only.

(1) Dirt or chips drawn through the blower will

make deep scratches in the rotors and housing and

throw up burrs around such abrasions. If burrs cause

interference between the rotors or between the rotors

and the housing, the blower should be removed from the

engine and the parts dressed down to eliminate the

interference, or the rotors must be replaced if they are

too badly scored.

(2) Leaky oil seals are usually manifested by

the presence of oil on the blower end plates and rotors or

the inside surfaces of the housing. This condition may

be checked by running the engine at low speed and

directing a light into the rotor compartment at the end

plates and the oil seals. A thin film of oil radiating away

from the seals is indicative of an oil leak.

CAUTION

Stop engine prior to grasping the top rotor and attempt to

rotate it.

(3) A worn blower drive, resulting in a rattling

noise inside the blower, may be detected by grasping the

top rotor firmly and attempting to rotate it. Rotors may

move from 3/8 inch to 5/8 inch, measured at the lobe

crown, with a springing action. When released, the

rotors should move back at least 1/4 inch. If the rotors

cannot be moved as directed above, or if the rotors move

too freely, the flexible blower drive coupling should be

inspected and replaced if necessary.

(4) Loose rotor shafts or damaged bearings

will cause rubbing and scoring between the crowns of the

rotor lobes and the mating rotor roots, between the rotors

and the end plates, or between the rotors and the

housing. Generally, a combination of these conditions

exists. A loose shaft usually causes rubbing between the

rotors and the end plates. Worn or damaged bearings

will cause rubbing between the mating rotor

4-35
TM 55-1905-217-12

lobes at some point or perhaps allow the rotor

assemblies to rub the blower housing. This condition will

usually show up at the end where the bearings have

failed.

(5) Excessive back-lash between the blower

timing gears usually results in the rotor lobes rubbing

throughout their entire length.

(6) To correct any of the above conditions, the

blower must be removed from the engine and repaired or

replaced. Refer to higher maintenance level.

4-38. Starting Aid - Pressurized Cylinder

a. General. All craft are equipped with the same

type starting aid although they are mounted and actuated

differently. The craft all have the starting aid mechanism

connected to the air inlet housing of the blower with a

small metal tube. See figures 2-6.1 and 4-41.1.

b. Service. Periodically perform the following

service items to assure good performance:

(1) Remove the fluid cylinder and lubricate the

valve around the pusher pin under the gasket with a few

drops of oil.

(2) Lubricate the actuator cable.

(3) Actuate the valve with the cable to

distribute the oil on the cable and allow the oil to run

down through the valve.

(4) Remove any dirt from the orifice by

removing the air inlet housing fitting, the orifice block and

the screen, and then blow air through the orifice end

only.

(5) Assemble and tighten the air inlet housing

fitting to the actuator valve and tube.

(6) Check for leakage of fluid (fogging) on the

outside of the engine air inlet housing by actuating the

starting aid while the engine is stopped. If fogging

occurs, disassemble and retighten the air inlet housing

fitting to the housing.

WARNING

Do not actuate the starting aid more than once with the

engine stopped. OVER-LOADING THE ENGINE AIR

BOX WITH THIS HIGH VOLATILE FLUID COULD

RESULT IN A MINOR EXPLOSION.

(7) Check the fluid cylinder for hand tightness.

SECTION XI. ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM

4-39. General

Each engine has a separate exhaust system consisting

of exhaust manifold, exhaust elbow, exhaust pipes, and

muffler as shown in figure 4-33 or 4-34. The exhaust

manifold is water cooled from the engine cooling system,

the exhaust pipes are covered with insulation, and the

muffler is water cooled with water pumped by the sea

water system. Refer to paragraph 4-22 for description

and removal of the exhaust manifold.

4-40. Mufflers

a. Removal.

(1) Disconnect sea water connection to

muffler.

(2) Remove bolts attaching muffler to exhaust

pipes.

(3) Remove bolts attaching muffler to support

brackets.

b. Installation. Install muffler in reverse order of

removal.

4-36
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-33. Exhaust system.

4-37
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-34. Engine exhaust system, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

SECTION XII. ENGINE COOLING SYSTEMS

4-41. General

a. Fresh Water Cooling Systems. These systems

provide cooling for the engines including the exhaust

manifolds. See figures 1-16 or 4-35. Water is circulated

by the engine water pump through

the engine and through the keel-mounted heat

exchanger. An expansion bank, with sight glass, is

included in each cooling system and is mounted in the

engine room. Check the water level daily as indicated in

the sight glass.

4-38
TM 55-1905-217-12

 Figure 4-35. Fresh water cooling systems.

4-39
TM 55-1905-217-12

b. Raw (Sea) Water Cooling Systems. These

systems provide cooling for the mufflers and priming for

the bilge pumps. See figures 1-17 or 4-36. Sea water

intake is at the sea chest which is in the hull adjacent to

the fresh water heat exchanger. There are separate

systems for each propulsion unit. Each system includes

two raw-water pumps which are mounted aft on the

engines. Raw water is pumped through sea mufflers and

discharged with the exhaust. The raw water system also

provides cooling for the fuel oil heat exchangers installed

in hulls 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618. Sea water

strainers (mounted in the engine room) are connected in

the intake lines between the sea chests and the pumps.

4-42. Heat Exchanger (Keel Cooler) Lines and

Connections

Inspect heat exchanger lines and connections for

leakage. Some are in the engine room and others are in

bilge compartments forward from the engine room. See

figures 1-16 or 4-35. Report defective hoses and clamps

to a higher authority.

4-43. Engine Water Manifold (fig. 4-37)

a. Removal.

(1) Drain cooling system to a level below the

water manifold.

(2) Loosen clamp and remove seal between

water manifold and thermostat housing.

(3) Remove water manifold stud nuts and

lockwashers and lift manifold off studs.

b. Installation. Remove all old gaskets and install

new gaskets. Install water manifold in reverse order of

removal.

4-44. Thermostat and Housing (fig. 4-38)

a. General. A properly operating thermostat is

essential for efficient operation of the engine. If the

engine operating temperature deviates from the normal

range of 160° to 185°, remove and check the thermostat.

b. Removal.

(1) Drain cooling system to level below the

thermostat housing.

(2) Loosen clamp and remove seal between

thermostat housing and water manifold.

(3) Remove four bolts and lockwashers and

remove the thermostat housing from the water tank.

Remove thermostat.

c. Thermostat. Inspect the thermostat for rust and

corrosion. A defective thermostat will not maintain

correct engine temperature. Check operation of the thermostat by placing in a container of hot

water with a thermometer. Replace a defective

thermostat.

d. Installation.

(1) Clean the seat for the thermostat.

(2) Affix a new gasket to the thermostat

housing.

(3) Install thermostat and housing in reverse

order of removal.

4-45. Fresh Water Pump (fig. 4-39)

a. General. The fresh water pump circulates

coolant through the cylinder block, cylinder head, heat

exchanger (keel cooler), oil coolers, and exhaust

manifold. The pump is mounted on the front end of the

blower and is driven by the lower blower rotor shaft. The

sealed type ball bearing is filled with lubricant at the time

it is assembled to the pump shaft and no further

lubrication is required.

b. Removal.

(1) Drain cooling system.

(2) Remove the inlet elbow from the pump.

(3) Remove the bolts and lockwashers that

attach the pump outlet flange to the cylinder block.

Remove the flange and packing ring.

(4) Remove the three bolt and seal ssemblies

that attach the pump to the blower assembly. Tool

J2242 can be used to loosen the inner bolt.

(5) Withdraw the pump and remove the

gasket.

c. Fresh Water Pump Installation.

(1) Place the pump outlet flange over the

pump outlet with the flat side of the flange facing the

pump body. Slip the packing ring over the pump outlet

and next to the flange.

(2) Using a new gasket at the bolting flange,

place the pump against the blower end-plate cover so

that the lugs on the drive coupling mesh with the lugs on

the intermediate shaft coupling. Secure the pump to the

blower with the three bolts and seal washers.

(3) Slide the pump outlet packing ring and

packing flange against the cylinder block and secure the

flange with two bolts and lockwashers.

(4) Install the water pump inlet elbow.

4-46. Raw (Sea) Water Pump

a. General. Raw water pumps are mounted on the

flywheel housing of each engine and driven by a coupling

from the end of the camshaft. See figure 4-40. The

impeller is self-lubricated by

4-40
TM 55-1905-217-12

 Figure 4-36. Raw (sea) water cooling systems.

4-41
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-37. Engine water manifold removal

Figure 4-38. Thermostat and thermostat housing

removal.

the water pumped and should not be run dry for longer

than normally required for the pump to prime itself. A

rotary-type seal seals against leakage along the raft.

b. Raw Water Pump Removal. If disassembly

or replacement of the pump becomes necessary, it may

be removed from the engine as follows:

(1) Remove nuts holding inlet and outlet

fittings (fig. 4-40) to water pump. Hull numbers 8540

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 have four nuts at each

port mounting flange.

(2) Remove adapter to flywheel housing bolts

and lockwashers.

(3) Using wood block or soft hammer, loosen

pump from flywheel housing by tapping on edge of

adaptor.

(4) Withdraw pump straight out from fly-wheel

housing, disengaging drive gear from coupling.

CAUTION

Cover pump opening in flywheel housing with clean cloth

to prevent entrance of foreign matter.

c. Raw Water Pump Installation. Install the pump

by reversing the removal procedures.

4-42
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-39. Fresh water pump mounting.

Figure 4-40. Raw (sea) water pump mountings.

SECTION XIII. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS AND GAGES

4-47. General

The electrical system (1-3 and 1-4 )includes two 70-amp,

24-volt alternators, one alternator mounted on the

inboard engine of each propulsion unit. Four 6-volt

batteries, connected in series to provide 24-volt current,

are contained in the battery box located aft in the engine

room. The alternators and batteries provided electrical

power to operate all lights and electrical accessories on

the landing craft and for the electric starters which are

mounted on the outboard engines of each propulsion

unit.

4-48. Alternators

a. Description. One 70-amp, 24-volt alternator is

belt driven from the inboard engine crank-shaft pulley.

The electrical circuit of the alternator uses six silicon

diodes in a full wave rectifier circuit. Since the diodes will

pass current from the alternator to the battery or load but

will not pass current from the battery to the alternator, the

alternator does not require the use of cutout relay. A

voltage regulator is the only control required.

CAUTION

Disconnect battery cables when working on alternator or

regulator.

b. In-Vessel Testing (Hull numbers 8500 thru 8519

and 8520 thru 8539). The following test procedures may

be performed to determine the condition of the alternator

and regulator while still in the vessel.

NOTE

When making the alternator system test, the batteries

must be in good condition and fully charged.

CAUTION

Do not under any circumstances, short FIELD terminal of

alternator to ground. Do not disconnect regulator while

alternator is operating. Do not disconnect alternator

output lead from alternator while the alternator is

operating.

(1) Check voltage across auxiliary terminal

(fig. 4-41.1) and negative output terminal with dc

voltmeter. Correct voltage is 0.2 volt. If the voltage

exceeds this value, the isolation diode is defective (fig.

4-41.3).

(2) Place jumper wire across oil pressure

switch on propulsion unit to short out switch. Check

voltage across auxiliary terminal (fig. 4-41.1) and

negative output terminal with dc voltmeter. Correct

voltage is 1.8-to 2.5-volts. This test evaluates field

circuit. If voltage at

4-43
TM 55-1905-217-12

auxiliary terminal is higher than specified, field circuit is

defective-check brushes. If voltage reads 0 volts at

auxiliary terminal, check field excitation device and

associated circuit. If voltage is not correct, perform test

in (6) below.

NOTE

Disconnect jumper wire after testing.

(3) With propulsion unit or engine running,

check voltage across auxiliary and negative output

terminals (fig. 4-41.1) with dc voltmeter. Correct

voltage is 29.4 ± 0.2 volts. If voltage is low, proceed with

tests.

(4) With engine running, check voltage across

positive and negative output terminals (fig. 4-41.1) with

dc voltmeter. Correct voltage at positive output terminal

is 1.0 volt less than voltage in (3) above. If voltage

difference exceeds 1.0 volt, isolation diode is defective.

(5) Stop engine and disconnect voltage

regulator (fig. 4-41.2). Place jumper wire across

auxiliary and field terminals. With engine-running at idle,

check voltage across auxiliary and negative output

terminals. Correct voltage is 29.4 ± 0.2 volts. If voltage

was low in (3) above and now rises to correct voltage,

regulator is defective and shall be replaced. If voltage

remains low, alternator is defective.

(6) Stop engine and remove jumper wire

across auxiliary and field terminals. Connect a dc

ammeter across field and positive output terminals (fig.

4-41.1) to measure field current (regulator

disconnected). Current should be 1.5 to 2.0 amperes.

Disassemble and repair alternator if current is excessive

or low.

c. In-Vessel Testing (Hull numbers 8540 thru 8560

and 8580 thru 8618.)

(1) Hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618 contain a revised model of the 70-amp, 24-volt

alternator. This model differs from the previous model

due to the replacement of the isolation diode with a field

diode assembly. The assembly consists of three rectifier

diodes, mounted on a common heat sink, electrically

connected in parallel with the conventional positive

rectifier diodes. After initial alternator excitation utilizing

battery energy, the field diode assembly provides the

continuing energy requirement. A new voltage regulator

is used in conjunction with the new alternator. The new

regulator is similar to the previous model but operates

the field at a one-volt lower value. Figure 4-41.4 is a

schematic of the alternator system. The following test

equipment is required to conduct the in-vessel alternator

system checks:

Figure 4-41.1. Alternator testing.(Sheet 1 of 8)

4-44
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-41.2. Alternator testing. (Sheet 2 of 8)

CAUTION

Do not disconnect either alternator output lead while the

alternator is operating.

CAUTION

Do not disconnect any battery cable connection while the

alternator is operating.

CAUTION

Do not ground alternator field terminal.

CAUTION

Disconnect negative battery cable prior to removing or

installing alternator or regulator.

NOTE

When doing alternator systems checks, ensure that

landing craft battery is in good condition and fully

charged.

(2) Volt-ammeter resistance testing unit with

following meter scales:

DC voltmeter 0-40 volts

DC ammeter 0-10 amps, 0-100 amps

Series Resistor 1/4 ohm

Field rheostat 0-50 ohm/65 watt

Carbon pile

Ohmmeter

DC test lamp, 12 or 24 volts

Battery hydrometer

Jumper leads 2, 4, 6, 10 feet in length with alligator clips

(3) Figures 4-41.5 through 4-41.8 provides

test instructions and test schematics to follow when testing the alternator system.

(4) The voltage regulator used on hull

numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 can be

adjusted by two methods to suit operating conditions.

CAUTION

Disconnect battery negative lead prior to removing or

installing the voltage regulator.

A step adjustment can be made by removing the voltage

regulator and using the metal strap provided on the

underside of the regulator. Placing the strap between

the center terminal and "LO" terminal, the voltage will be

decreased by 0.6 volt. A fine adjustment of the voltage

can be made by the following procedure:

(a) Engine not running.

(b) Connect voltmeter across battery

terminals.

(c) Connect ammeter (0-100 amp

scale) between the positive terminal of the starter

solenoid and the positive output terminal of the

alternator.

(d) Start engine and operate at 1000

rpm.

(e) Apply accessory load (or adjust

carbon pile) until ammeter reads 10.0 to 15.0 amperes.

(f) Allow electrical system to stabilize

(voltmeter stops changing).

(g) Remove the screw in the regulator

cover to gain access to the rheostat. Using a No. 0

Phillip screwdriver, turn 1 clockwise to increase voltage

or counterclockwise to decrease the voltage until the

voltmeter indicates the desired reading.

CAUTION

Do not force rheostat beyond stops.

(h) Replace screw in regulator cover

when adjustment is completed.

d. Alternator Removal (fig. 4-42 and fig. 4-43) for

Hull Numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

(1) Remove the alternator cover.

(2) Remove and tag electrical leads.

(3) Remove -adjustment strap bolt and move

alternator as necessary to remove belt.

(4) Remove mounting bolt and remove

alternator.

4-45
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-41.3. Alternator testing. (Sheet 3 of 8)

Figure 4-41.4. Alternator testing. (Sheet 4 of 8)

NOTE

Alternator illustrated in figure 4-43 is mounted on the

inboard engine of the starboard propulsion unit on hull

numbers 6500 thru 8519. Alternators on port propulsion

units end alternators on hull numbers 8620 thru 8560

and 8580 thru 8619 are mounted differently but removal

procedure are similar.

e. Cleaning. Clean all foreign matter (oil, grease,

dirt, etc.) from alternator and wiring.

f. Removing Brush and Holder Assembly.

(1) Remove alternator rear housing cover (fig.

4-43).

(2) Remove screws or clips from terminals.

(3) Lift brush assembly up and away from the

slip rings.

g. Cleaning and Inspection of Brush Assembly.

(1) Clean brush assembly with an air hose.

(2) Check length of brushes; replace if they

extend -less than 1/4 inch beyond brush holder.

(3) Check wires and terminals for wear and

breakage.

h. Installing Brush and Holder Assembly. Install

brush holder assembly in reverse order of removal.

4-46
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-41.5. Alternator testing. (Sheet 5 of 8)

4-47
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-41.6. Alternator testing. (Sheet 6 of 8)

4-48

TM 55-1905-217-12

G. Field current test (hull number 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618).

Figure 4-41.7. Alternator testing. (Sheet 7 of 8)

4-49
TM 55-1905-217-12

H. Voltage regulator-alternator output test (hull numbers 8540 thru 8660 and 8680 thru 8618).

Figure 4-41.8. Alternator testing. (Sheet 8 of 8)

4-50
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-42. Alternator cover, removal.

i. Installing Alternator.

(1) Install alternator in reverse order of

removal.

(2) Install and adjust belt.

4-49. Voltage Regulators

a. Description. The all-electronic transistorized

voltage regulator is an electronic device using no

mechanical contacts or relays. When the voltage supply

is below a predetermined amount the transistor

conducts, acting like a closed switch between the supply

voltage and the field of the alternator. When the supply

is above a predetermined amount the transistor is cut off,

acting like an open switch which removes the excitation

from the field, reducing alternator output.

b. Removal.

(1) Remove and tag voltage regulator

electrical leads.

(2) Remove mounting nuts and remove

regulator.

c. Installation. Install voltage regulator in reverse

order of removal.

Figure 4-43. Alternator, removal.

4-50. Electric Starting Motors (fig. 4-44)

a. General. Electric starting motors are installed on

the outboard engines of each propulsion unit. The two

electric starting motors, model numbers 1108850 and

1108890, are identical except for direction of rotation.

Model number 1108850 has a clockwise rotation, viewing

from the drive end, and is installed on the outboard

engine of the starboard propulsion unit. Model number

1108890 has a counterclockwise rotation, viewing from

the drive end, and is installed on the outboard engine of

the port propulsion unit.

b. Servicing Starting Motor Brushes.

(1) Disconnect negative lead at battery.

(2) Remove and tag solenoid switch leads.

(3) Remove solenoid switch and switch

support.

(4) Remove starter cover band assembly.

(5) Inspect the brushes. The brushes must

be making good contact with the commutator. If the

brushes are worn down to 5/16 inch (original length 1/2

inch), replace brushes. Make sure that the pigtail leads

are tight in the brushes and the clips are fastened

securely to the leads.

(6) Install cover band assembly, solenoid

switch, and leads in reverse order of removal.

4-51
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-44. Electric starter and solenoid switch.

c. Electric Starter Removal (fig. 4-44).

(1) Disconnect negative lead at battery.

(2) Remove and tag solenoid switch leads.

(3) Remove solenoid switch and switch

support.

(4) Remove and tag starter leads.

(5) Turn fuel filter valve lever to shut off the

forward filter. Drain filter and remove the shell and

element.

(6) Remove the three bolts and lockwashers

securing the starting motor to the flywheel housing and

remove starting motor from the engine.

d. Starting Motor Installation. Reverse removal

procedures, using a serviceable starting motor.

4-51. Battery Cables (fig. 3-10)

a. Removal. Disconnect and remove the negative

lead, then disconnect and remove the positive lead.

b. Installation. Reverse procedure above.

4-52. Instruments and Gages

a. General. Instruments and gages are located on

panels in the pilot house and in the engine room.

b. Removal (fig. 2-3 or 4-45).

(1) Remove plastic panel cover.

(2) Remove access cover.

(3) Remove attaching clamp at rear of panel

and remove instrument or gage.

c. Installation. Install instrument or gage in reverse

order of removal.

4-53. Tachometers and Tachometer Drives

a. General. Tachometers are mounted in the pilot

house instrument panel, one for each engine. The

tachometer drives are mounted on the transmission oil

pumps at the rear of each engine.

b. Removal..

(1) Refer to paragraph 4-52 for removal of

tachometers from the instrument panel.

(2) Refer to figure 4-46 or 4-47 for removal of

tachometer drive.

4-54. Warning Lights and Sending .Units

a. General. Sending units (lobe oil pressure switch

and water temperature switch) are installed on each

engine to provide warnings to be indicated on the engine

alarm panel (fig. 2-8.1 or 4-45) if the engine lubricating oil

pressure is too low or if the engine water temperature is

too high. To protect the circuit and switches, the circuit

is not energized until the fuel oil pressure switch is

closed. The fuel oil pressure switches are installed in the

fuel oil manifolds which are a part of the engine cylinder

head casting.

b. Testing.

(1) With engine stopped, place a jumper wire

across the fuel oil pressure switch terminals.

NOTE

On hull number 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618,

there are two fuel oil pressure switches in the fuel oil

manifold of each inboard engine. Place the jumper wire

only on the switch with four leads. The switch with two

leads is not included in the alarm circuit.

(2) Move the engine alarm indicator switch

(on distribution panel) to the ON position. The lamp

should light for the circuit being tested. If further testing

is required, refer to higher echelon.

4-55. Navigational and Utility Lights

Refer to figures 2-2 (hull numbers 8520 thru 8539), or 2-

3 (hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618) for

identification and location of lights.

4-52
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-45. Instruments and gages.

Figure 4-46. Tachometer drive.

Figure 4-47. Tachometer drive, hull numbers 8540 thru

8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

4-53
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Collar and setscrew 5. Ball joint washer and nut 9. Cable

2. Shaft 6. Battery gain pointometer 10. Meter pilot house

3. Transmitter pointometer 7. Battery 11. Cable

(lazarette) 8. Battery box (engine

4. Arm room)

Figure 4-48. Rudder angle indicator installation, hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

4-56. Rudder Angle Indicator (Hull Numbers 8540

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (fig. 4-48)

a. General. The indicator system consists of the

indicating meter, a transmitter, and a battery box. The

rudder angle indicator is installed in the pilot house

starboard instrument panel. The transmitter is

connected by a rod to the port rudder crank and is

accessible from the engine room. The battery box

provides a gain adjust to compensate for drain of the

size "D" 1.5-volt flashlight cell contained within the box.

Figure 4-48 contains an electrical schematic of the indicator system and installation details.

b. Inspection. Move rudder to extreme starboard.

Check to see if meter indicates approximate angle is

correct direction. Move rudder to extreme port and

check meter indication. If angle shown does not agree,

adjust gain control on battery box (6) to cause it to read

correctly. Position rudder amidships. If meter does not

indicate zero, loosen collar locking screw (1) on

transmitter lever. Turn transmitter shaft with screwdriver

until meter reads zero. Tighten locking screw. If meter

does not respond to gain control adjustment, replace

battery (7) in battery box.

SECTION XIV. HYDRAULIC STARTING SYSTEM

4-57. General

a. The landing craft is fitted with a dual cranking

system for the propulsion engines. The outboard engine

of each propulsion unit is

equipped with an electric starting motor and each

inboard engine is cranked by a hydraulic starting motor.

See figure 1-6 for hull numbers 8500 thru 8519, figure 1-7

 for hull numbers 8520 thru 8539; or figure 1-8 for hull

numbers

4-54
TM 55-1905-217-12

8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 which incorporate a

fuel pressure switch to prevent accidental engagement of

the hydrostarters when the engine is running.

b. Energy required for hydraulic cranking is

supplied by fluid stored under approximately 3,000 PSI

pressure in two interconnected accumulators. These

accumulators are charged first by a hand operated

hydraulic pump and then by engine driven pumps. They

will not be over-charged during long periods of engine

operation because of pressure control built into the

pumps. There is also a system relief valve set at 3,400

PSI, which is the safe maximum pressure for this

system.

4-58. Filling the Hydraulic Starting System with

Fluid

a. Servicing. Fill reservoir with suitable hydraulic oil

(Sym. 2135TH or Sym. 2075TH of MIL-L-17672B).

Reservoir capacity is 7 gallons.

b. Purging.

(1) Hand pump. Loosen discharge

connection and operate hand pump slowly until all air is

expelled. Retighten connection.

(2) Engine driven pump. With the engine

running at 1,500 rpm or more, loosen the hose

connection at the discharge side of the pump (fig. 4-49)

until a full stream of oil is discharged. Connect the hose

to the pump and alternately loosen and tighten the swivel

fitting on the discharge hose until the oil leaking out,

when fitting is loose, appears free of air bubbles.

4-59. Filter

a. General. On hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 the

filter is mounted near the reservoir on the starboard side

of the engine room. See figure 4-50. The same filter is

used on hull numbers 8520 thru 8539 but it is mounted

below the central deck plate between the two propulsion

unit. The deck plate must be removed to service this

filter. On hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618, a different type filter is mounted on the starboard

side of the reservoir. See figure 2-18.

b. Filter service (fig. 4-51). Change the filter every

2000 hours of operation.

(1) Close outlet valve at reservoir (hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519).

(2) Relieve pressure in lines on hull numbers

8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

Figure 4-49. Hydraulic starting system pump.

(3) Remove filter from the line connections

and remove end cap.

(4) On hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618, unscrew the filter outer shell and remove the

element.

4-60. Accumulator (fig. 4-52)

a. General. Two accumulators are provided, one

mounted on each side of the engine room. When both

accumulators are at full pressure, one should be secured

(valve closed) and held in reserve. One accumulator will

service both engines under normal conditions.

b. Accumulator Removal.

(1) Close valve on opposite accumulator.

(2) Release oil pressure in the hydraulic

starting system lines.

(3) Refer to figure 4-52 and remove

accumulator by removing support clamps.

c. Charging Accumulator with Nitrogen.

(1) Secure accumulator in a pipe vise or a

suitable clamp, so that the accumulator is rigid and

stable.

(2) Using special charging assembly, attach

gage end of assembly to the nitrogen tank.

(3) Mount swivel connector on the

accumulator air valve. Hand tighten sufficiently to

compress gasket in swivel connector to prevent gas

leakage. Loosen locknut on air valve.

(4) Introduce nitrogen gas (50 psi only). DO

NOT EXCEED 50 PSI.

4-55
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-50. Hydraulic starting system reservoirs.

(5) The piston should be against the oil end

cap before further charging the accumulator. Determine

the position of the piston by inserting a six inch long (1/4

in. dia.) wooden dowel through the oil port opening. If

the piston is against the oil end cap, the dowel will touch

the piston.

Figure 4-51. Filter, hydraulic starting system.

Figure 4-52. Accumulator, Gage and Valve.

4-56
TM 55-1905-217-12

CAUTION

DO NOT STAND IN FRONT OF DOWEL IN CASE

PISTON IS SEIZED.

(6) If the piston cannot be touched with the six

inch dowel, the following must be adhered to:

(a) The gas must be released by

opening charging valve.

(b) The gas end cap must be removed.

(c) Inspect and determine the condition

preventing movement of the piston.

(d) After corrective action has been

made, then manually move piston all the way to the oil

end with a long wooden dowel.

(e) Reassemble and charge the

accumulator to the prescribed pressure.

CAUTION

NEVER ATTEMPT TO CHARGE ACCUMULATOR

WITHOUT FOLLOW-ING THE ABOVE PROCEDURE.

(7) Proceed to charge accumulator by

opening valve on nitrogen bottle slowly, closing it

occassionally to allow needle on gage (1) to settle in

position, thus giving the correct pressure in the

accumulator.

(8) Close valve on nitrogen tank, tighten

locknut on air valve, and torque to 140-160 in.- lbs.

Remove charging hose.

d. Test Procedure for Accumulators.

(1) After the accumulator has been charged to

the desired pressure, it should be immersed in a tank

containing a non-corrosive liquid and checked for proper

sealing of the packings on accumulator piston. The oil

inlet port of the accumulator must be left open during this

test. Also check for possible leaks of the Air Valve

Assembly, (cap removed). Air bubbles in the liquid

indicate nitrogen leakage.

(2) Drain dry and allow the accumulator to set

undisturbed for a minimum period of one hour. With

Service Tool TSE 8601, recheck the gas pressure in the

accumulator. See note.

NOTE

With SERVICE TOOL TSE 8601 fastened securely to

the Air Valve Assembly, loosen nut on air valve. The

gage will indicate the amount of nitrogen gas precharge

pressure in the accumulator. Before removing gage,

tighten locknut on air valve. When using this tool, the

hydraulic pressure in the accumulator should be at zero

before attaching the gage device to the accumulator.

(3) If the pressure is lower by more than 5

percent, the accumulator must again be connected to

Service Tool TSE 8601 and additional nitrogen added.

Repeat steps (1) and (2).

(4) A cycling test should be performed to

assure that accumulator is functioning properly. The

accumulator may be connected to any simple test circuit,

consisting of a reservoir, pump, accumulator and a valve.

(5) The hydraulic valve should remain in the

open position until the pump has run a sufficient period

to bleed all air from the line. With the pump still

operating, close the valve. Allow pump to charge the

accumulator to 3,000 PSI. Open the hydraulic valve to

allow stored oil in the accumulator to flow back into the

reservoir. Repeat this charge and discharge cycle

several times to insure the piston is not sticking or

binding.

(6) During the cycling test, inspect for possible

oil leaks at caps and discharge fitting of accumulator.

(7) When the test cycle has been completed,

remove the accumulator from the test circuit.

CAUTION

Always release all hydraulic pressure in the system

before disconnecting any lines.

Close the oil port with a suitable plug to prevent entrance

of foreign matter during storage and shipping.

4-61. Engine Driven Pumps

a. General. The engine driven charging pump is a

single piston positive displacement type. The ball check

valves and the unloading valve are automatically

controlled by the accumulator pressure. The pump shaft

is supported on ball bearings; a seal, pressed into the

pump bearing retainer, prevents leakage. The pump is

attached to the flywheel housing (fig. 4-49) and is driven

by a drive plate bolted to the balance shaft gear.

b. Pump Removal.

(1) Close both accumulator valves.

(2) Release -the oil pressure in the hydraulic

starting system.

CAUTION

The oil pressure in the system must be released prior to

servicing the engine driven pump or other parts to

prevent possible injury to personnel or equipment.

4-57
TM 55-1905-217-12

(3) Clean all of the exterior dirt from the pump

and the hydraulic lines.

(4) Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the

pump and the hydraulic lines.

(4) Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the

pump. Then, loosen the bolts holding the mounting plate

and remove the plate and pump as an assembly.

c. Pump Installation. See figure 4-49.

(1) Affix a new gasket to the flywheel housing,

using a non-hardening gasket cement on the flywheel

housing side only.

(2) Aline the tangs on the pump drive with the

slobs in the drive plate. Attach the pump and mounting

plate securely to the engine with bolts and lockwashers.

CAUTION

Do not force the pump into place. Use of force, or

tightening the bolts when the mounting flange is not

against the flywheel housing, will force the drive arm

against the pump body and result in damage to the pump

when the engine is started.

(3) Apply sealant sparingly to all MALE PIPE

THREADS only and work it into the threads.

CAUTION

Do not apply sealant to the last thread (that nearest the

open end) or to female fittings, as it may wash into the

system.

(4) Connect the hydraulic lines to the pump.

4-62. Hand Pump Hydraulic Starting System (fig.

2-21 or fig. 2-22)

a. General. The hand pump is used to provide the

initial hydraulic pressure for first starts or to build up

pressure in the hydraulic starting system if it has been

released for any reason.

b. Removal (fig. 2-21 or fig. 2-22).

(1) Close both accumulator valves.

(2) Release the pressure in the hydraulic

starting system.

CAUTION

The oil pressure in the system must be released prior to

servicing the hand pump or any other components of the

system, to prevent possible injury to personnel or

equipment.

(3) Clean all of the exterior dirt from the hand

pump and the hydraulic lines.

(4) Disconnect the hydraulic lines to the

pump.

(5) Remove the attaching bolts and

lockwashers and lift the pump from its mounting.

c. Installation

(1) Secure the pump to its mounting with

attaching bolts and lockwashers.

(2) Refer to figure 2-21 and connect the

hydraulic lines.

NOTE

Make sure the lines and fittings are clean before any

connections are made. With the exception of the thread

nearest the open end, sealant must be applied in a small

amount to ONLY the male threads. Never apply sealant

to the female threads. Work the sealant into the threads

and wipe off the excess with a clean, lint-free cloth so

that the sealant will not be washed into the system.

4-63. Hydraulic Starting Motors

a. General. Hydraulic starting motors are installed

on the inboard engine of each propulsion unit. The two

hydraulic starting motors, CMD-2A-111 and CMD-2A221, are similar except for direction of rotation. Model

CMD-2A-111 has a clockwise rotation, viewing from the

starter drive end, and is mounted on the inboard engine

of the starboard propulsion unit. Model CMD-2A-221

rotates counterclockwise, viewing from the drive end,

and is mounted on the inboard engine of the port

propulsion unit.

b. Removal.

(1) Close both accumulator valves.

(2) Release pressure in hydraulic system

lines.

(3) Clean all of the exterior dirt from the

starter and the hydraulic lines.

(4) Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the

starting motor. Cover the open ends of the lines with

masking tape to prevent the entry of dirt.

(5) Remove the three retaining bolts and

lockwashers and lift the starting motor away from the

flywheel housing.

c. Installation (fig. 4-5).

(1) Insert the hydraulic starting motor in the

flywheel housing opening. When properly alined, the

pilot diameter of the hydraulic starting motor adapter will

enter easily-do not use force. Rotate the starting motor

so that the bolt holes are alined with the tapped holes in

the flywheel housing. Then secure the starting motor to

the flywheel housing with three bolts and lockwashers.

4-58
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-53. Hydraulic starting motor removal.

(2) Connect the hydraulic lines to the

hydraulic starting motor.

NOTE

Make cure the lines and fittings a dean before any

connections are made.

4-64. Solenoid Valve (Hull Numbers 8500 thru

85,19)

a. General. The solenoid valves are used to

control the hydraulic starting motors on hull numbers

8500 thru 8519. They can be actuated electrically from

the pilot house or manually in the engine room.

b. Removal (fig. 4-54).

(1) Close accumulator valves.

(2) Relieve pressure in lines.

(3) Remove and tag electrical connections.

(4) Remove hydraulic lines from solenoid

valve.

(5) Remove solenoid valve from bracket.

c. Installation. Install solenoid valve in reverse

order of removal.

4-65. Hydraulic Starting Control Valve (Hull

Numbers 8520 thru 8539)

a. General. This is a mechanically actuated control

valve used to control the hydraulic starting motors on hull

numbers 8520 thru 8539. The valves are mounted aft on

the inboard engines and can be actuated at the valve by

pushing the control lever or from the pilot house by

pulling on the cable control. See figure 4-55.

Figure 4-54. Hydraulic starting solenoid valve, hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519.

Figure 4-55. Hydraulic starting control valve, hull

numbers 8520 thru 8539.

b. Removal.

(1) Disconnect pilot house cable at valve.

(2) Close accumulator valves.

(3) Relieve pressure in lines.

(4) Remove hydraulic lines from control valve.

(5) Remove control valve from bracket.

c. Installation. Install control valve in reverse order

of removal.

4-59
TM 55-1905-217-12

4-66. Hydraulic Starting Control Valve (Hull

Numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618)

a. General. The control valve is an electrically

actuated poppet-type valve used to port hydraulic

pressure to the hydraulic cranking motors. The valve,

normally closed, is openel by solenoid action when the

engine start pushbutton is depressed. The control valve

incorporates a manual override, which is open in normal

operation. In the event of electrical failure, the manual

override valve is closed and hydraulic pressure opens

the poppet valve, allowing fluid to operate the cranking

motor.

b. Removal (fig. 2-11).

(1) Remove battery ground lead.

(2) Disconnect and tag electrical leads at

control valve.

(3) Relieve pressure in hydraulic starting

system.

(4) Disconnect and cap hydraulic lines at

valve.

(5) Remove mounting bolts and remove

valve.

(6) Tag wheel in pilot house indicating valve

removed.

c. Installation (fig. 2-11).

(1) With valve in place, install mounting bolts.

Torque to 30-39 foot pounds.

(2) Connect hydraulic lines.

(3) Connect electrical leads.

(4) Connect battery ground lead.

(5) Pressurize and purge system and check

connections for leakage.

4-67. Relief Valve

a. General. Each engine hydraulic starting system

pump has an inbuilt pressure limiting device. These are

backed up by a system relief valve which is set at 3,300

psi on hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and 3,400 psi on hull

numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618. The relief

valve is mounted adjacent to the starboard solenoid

starting valve on hull numbers 8500 thru 8619. On hull

numbers 8520 thru 8539 the relief valve is located

between the hydraulic system reservoir and the steering

system reservoir. On hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and

8580 thru 8618, the system relief valve is located on the

starboard side of the hydraulic starting system reservoir

(fig. 2-18).

b. Removal.

(1) Close accumulator valves.

(2) Relieve pressure in hydraulic lines.

(3) Remove hydraulic lines from relief valve.

c. Disassembly and Repair. This is a permanently

assembled unit. The only parts serviced are the

adjusting screw, the adjusting screw packing, and the

external preformed packing.

d. Installation. Install in reverse order of removal.

SECTION XV. TRANSMISSION

4-68. General

a. The torqmatic marine reverse gear and the

flywheel assembly provide an emergency forward clutch

lock and positive clutch engagement or release by simply

moving the selector valve lever to the desired position for

forward, neutral, or reverse.

b. Each marine gear consists of a flywheel and

forward drive clutch assembly and a reverse drive clutch

assembly with a through drive shaft. Also, each has an

oil pump for supplying oil under pressure for operating

the forward and reverse clutches, a control valve to

admit oil to the clutches, an oil strainer, a full-flow oil

filter, and an oil cooler.

c. Power from the diesel engine is imparted to the

through drive shaft by locking the forward or reverse

clutch plate between the hydraulically operated piston

and a drive plate.

4-69. Emergency Clutch Engagement

a. If for any reason the clutches on the engines of a

unit cannot be engaged hydraulically, the forward clutch

plate may be engaged on the engines with three

emergency engagement bolts provided.

b. Refer to figure 456 for the location of the

emergency engagement bolts. Lock the forward clutch

plate in forward drive as follows:

(1) Remove the electric starter in the forward

face of the flywheel housing.

(2) With the engine throttle set in the STOP

position, rotate the engine flywheel until one of the

emergency engagement bolts (48) is in line with {the

starter opening in the flywheel housing.

(3) Remove the emergency engagement bolt

and jam nut from the flywheel through the starter

opening.

4-60
TM 55-1905-217-12

(4) Remove the jam nut from the bolt and

save the nut; then, thread the bolt back into the flywheel

until the end of the bolt just contacts the forward clutch

piston.

(5) Remove the remaining emergency

engagement bolts and jam nuts, and reinstall the bolts as

outlined above.

(6) Tighten all of the bolts uniformly, thus

locking the forward clutch plate (47) between the piston

(3) and the drive plate (4). Install the starter in the

flywheel housing.

NOTE

The emergency engagement bolts must be tightened

uniformly to prevent bind between the close-fitting piston

and the bore in the flywheel.

NOTE

When the emergency engagement bolts are engaged,

do not use reverse drive or the gear will be damaged.

4-70. Transmission Oil Pump

a. General

(1) Oil pressure to operate the forward and

reverse-clutches of the torqmatic marine gear is provided

by a positive displacement rotor-type oil pump mounted

on the rear face of the flywheel housing. The pump is

driven by the blower drive shaft through two hubs and a

coupling.

(2) For hull numbers 8500 thru 8539 the

pump has a constant flow control valve incorporated with

the pressure relief valve, forming a constant flow and

relief valve assembly. At all engine speeds, the oil flow

is approximately 6 gpm. For hulls 8540 thru 8560 and

8680 thru 8618, the pump relief valve is factory adjusted

and permanently closed.

(3) Pumps are built for right-hand and lefthand rotation depending on the engine model on which

they are used. The direction of rotation is marked on the

pump body.

(4) A bleed hole in the oil pump body and the

cover leads from the oil seal cavity to intake side of the

pump to avoid a pressure build-up back of the oil seals.

b. Removal (fig. 4-57).

(1) Disconnect the tachometer drive cable

from the drive.

(2) Remove the transmission oil strainer.

(3) Disconnect the oil pump outlet hose.

(4) Remove the bolts, nuts, and lockwashers

securing the oil pump to the flywheel housing. Then,

remove the oil pump from the flywheel housing.

c. Installation.

(1) Affix a new gasket to the flange of the oil

pump body.

NOTE

The oil pump to flywheel housing gasket and the flywheel

housing small hole gasket are very similar in design.

When installing a new oil pump to flywheel housing

gasket, be sure to use the proper gasket to prevent oil

leaks. The oil pump gasket has an inside diameter of

approximately 3 17/32 inch.

(2) Position the oil pump assembly in back of

the flywheel housing as shown in figure 4-57. Then, with

the teeth on the drive coupling hub in position to mesh

with the teeth in the drive coupling, place the pump

agains the flywheel housing and secure ion place with

bolts, lockwashers, and nuts.

(3) Complete the installation in reverse order

of removal.

(4) For hulls 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8598, adjust a newly installed transmission hydraulic oil

pump as follows:

(a) Remove the allen head plug in the

transmission oil filter.

(b) Insert a pressure gauge (300 psi

min.) at the filter.

(c) Remove acorn nut and back off

locknut of the pressure regulating valve on the pump.

(d) Back off the regulating valve

adjusting screw to the left.

(e) Start the engine.

(f) Insert a screw driver into the slot of

the adjusting screw and turn clockwise until the pressure

gage reading is 180 PSI.

(g) Lock adjusting screw with locking

nut and install acorn nut.

(h) Stop engine and after a few minutes

carefully remove the pressure gauge and install the allen

head plug to the oil filter.

(i) During the adjustment cycle the oil

dipstick should be check 2-or 3-times to insure that oil

level is about half way up to the PULL mark.

NOTE

For hulls 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618, prior to

replacing the HYDRECO engine driven hydraulic pump,

deactivate existing pressure by removing the acorn nut

and turning the adjusting screw clockwise. Replace the

acorn nut.

4-61
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Reverse gear drive shaft 7. Reverse clutch piston 13. Driven shaft bearing

2. Flywheel ring gear 8. Bearing cover

3. Forward clutch drive 9. Driven gear locknut 14. Driven shaft bearing

4. Forward clutch drive 10. Driven gear nut lock- cover oil seal

plate washer 15. Drive flange

5. Reverse gear to flywheel 11. Spacer 16. Drive flange nut

housing gasket 12. Driven shaft bearing 17. Driven shaft

6. Reverse clutch plate assembly 18. Cotter pin

Figure 4-56. Toqmatic marine gear.

4-62
TM 55-1905-217-12

19.Bearing cover bolt 31.Adapter plate dowel pin 41. Flywheel housing

2O.Lockwasher 32.Transfer gear housing to 42. Planetary gear assembly

21.Bearing cover gasket adapter plate gasket 43. Flywheel pilot bearing

22.Driven gear 33.Reverse gear adapter 44. Flywheel to crankshaft

23.Drive gear bearing plate bolt

assembly (rear) 34. Reverse gear to adapter 45. Flywheel pilot bearing

24. Cover (special) plate gasket retainer

25. Reveres gear drive shaft 35. Reverse gear housing 46. Flywheel

cover 36. Reverse ring gear 47. Forward clutch plate

26. Drive shaft cover bolt 37. Reverse clutch drive 48. Emergency engagement

27. Drive shaft cover gasket plate bolt

28. Drive gear (pinion) 38. Dump valve plug 49. Nut

29. Transfer gear housing 39. Forward clutch dump 50. Reverse gear to adapter

30. Drive gear bearing valve plate bolt

assembly (front) 40. Dump valve spring

Figure 4-56. Continued.

Figure 4-57. Transmission oil pump removal.

4-71. Transmission Control Valve (fig. 4-58)

a. General. The control valve assembly consists of

a master selector valve for controlling both engines of the

power unit simultaneously and separate shutoff control

valves for controlling the flow of the oil to each individual

engine marine gear. For hull numbers 8540 thru 8560

and 8580 thru 8618, the selector valve is modified to

include regulating valve components.

Three oil passages, for forward drive, for reverse drive,

and for neutral and lubrication, are provided in each

reverse gear housing. Oil grooves and passages are

machined in the selector control valve so that, when it is

rotated to the forward position by the lever, oil is admitted

to the forward oil passage in the gear

housing. When the selector control valve is rotated to the

reverse position, oil is admitted to the reverse oil

passage. The neutral (lubricating) oil passage is never

cut off regard-less of the position of the selector control

valve.

4-72. Transmission Oil Cooler

a. General.

(1) To provide additional cooling for the

lubricating oil used in the torqmatic marine gear, a

separate oil cooler is mounted on each engine. Thus,

sufficient additional cooling is provided to insure that

normal operating temperatures are maintained in the

marine gear oil system under all conditions of speed and

load in both forward and reverse.

(2) Oil is drawn through the oil strainer from the

marine gear oil sump by the marine gear oil pump and

then is circulated through the oil filter and oil cooler to the

selector control valve.

Figure 4-58. Transmission control valve.

4-63
TM 55-1905-217-12

(3) The oil cooler element should be

removed and cleaned periodically, or at the time of

each engine or marine gear overhaul, to prevent

overheating of the marine gear oil.

b. Removing Oil Cooler Element (fig. 4-59).

(1) Drain the cooling system.

(2) Remove engine oil filter and bracket.

(3) Remove oil tubes from engine oil cooler

cover.

(4) Matchmark the end of the oil cooler

cover, cooler element, and cooler housing with a

punch or file so they can be installed in their same

relative positions.

(5) Remove the bolts and lockwashers

securing the oil cooler cover to the oil cooler housing.

Then, pull the cover away from the element.

NOTE

If necessary, loosen the oil tube clips at the

side of the cylinder block.

(6) Remove the oil cooler element from the

oil cooler housing (fig. 4-60).

(7) Remove the gaskets from the oil cooler

over, element, land housing.

c. Cleaning Oil Cooler Element.

(1) Clean oil side of element. Circulate a

solution of trichloroethylene through the core passages

with a force pump to remove the carbon and sludge.

CAUTION

This operation should be done in the open

or in a well ventilated room when

trichloroethylene or other toxic chemicals

are used for cleansing.

Figure 4-59. Transmission oil cooler removal.

Figure 4-60. Transmission oil cooler details.

(2) Clean the element before sludge hardens. If

the oil passages -are badly clogged, circulate an Oakite or

alkaline solution through the core and flush thoroughly with

clean, hot water.

(3) Clean water side of element. After cleaning

the oil side of the element, immerse it in the following

solution: Add one-half (1/2) pound of oxalic acid to each two

and one-half (2 1/2) gallons of solution composed of onethird (1/3) muriatic acid and two-thirds (2/3) water. The

cleaning action is evidenced by bubbling and foaming. The

process must be care fully watched and, when bubbling

stops (this usually takes from 30 to 60 seconds), the

element should be removed from the cleaning solution and

thoroughly flushed with clean, hot water. After cleaning, dip

the element in light oil.

NOTE

Cleaning an oil cooler element is not recommen ded

where the history of usage shows a marine gear

failure which has released metal particles from

worn and broken parts, into the lubricating oil. In this

instance, the replacement of the oil cooler is strongly

recommended.

d. Installing Oil Cooler Element.

(1’) Affix a new gasket to the oil cooler housing (fig.

4460).

(2) Affix a new gasket to the inner face of the oil

cooler cover.

(3) Install the oil cooler element into the oil cooler

housing with the matchmarks previously placed on the

element and housing in alignment.

4-64
TM 55-1905-217-12

(4) Place the oil cooler cover against the oil cooler

element with the matchmarks in alinement, and install

two bolts and lockwashers to hold the cover and element

in place.

(5) Install the remaining bolts and lockwashers.

Tighten the bolts to 13-17 ft-lb torque.

(6) Attach the two oil tubes to the end of the oil

cooler cover.

(7) Install engine oil filter bracket and filter.

(8) Fill the engine cooling system.

(9) Start the engine and check for oil and water

leaks.

(10) Check the oil level in the marine gear.

Add oil if necessary.

SECTION XVI. POWER TRANSFER ASSEMBLY~

4-73. General

Power developed by the two engines is delivered through

the hydraulic marine gear system to the drive gear (4, fig.

4-61), thence to the power driven gear (32) and power

driven shaft (13). The power transfer gear is splash

lubricated with oil in the marine gear system.

4-74. Service

a. If an oil leak should develop, gaskets (26, fig. 4-61)

 and (11) can be replaced by removing the

appropriate cover.

b. If major repairs are needed, transfer gear

’assembly must be removed from the engine. Refer to

higher echelon.

SECTION XVII. HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM

4-75. General

a. The hydraulic steering systems for these craft

are similar, but some components are different. See

figure 1-9 for diagram of hull numbers 8500 thru 8519

steering system or figure 1-10 for diagram of hull

numbers 8520 thru 8539 steering system. See figure 1-11

for diagram of hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580

thru 8618 steering system. Hull numbers 8540 thru 8560

and 8580 thru 8618 incorporate a closed system. Return

lines from the actuating cylinders and counterbalance

valves return hydraulic fluid to the steering reservoir.

b The hydraulic steering systems use medium

pressure hydraulic oil to actuate cylinders which position

the rudders. Oil is supplied by the hydraulic pumps to the

helm unit which is the principal metering and directional

controlling device. By directing hydraulic oil to one side or

the other of the cylinders they will extend or retract giving

the desired position to the rudders.

c. The helm unit and other valves control the

’direction and volume of flow of hydraulic oil. The relief

valve protects the system by limiting hydraulic oil

pressure. The flow control valve (flow divider)’limits the

volume of oil to the value at which this system is

designed to work. The flow control valve (flow divider)

divides the oil supplied into two flows (2.5 gpm hull

numbers 8500 thru 8518, 2 gpm hull numbers 8520 thru

8560 and 8580 thru 8618) to the helm unit, and the

remainder returned to the storage tank.

NOTE

The hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 steering

system is designed to be supplied by one pump.

Using both pumps will only cause a doubled bypass flow resulting in excessive heating of oil.

The steering system pump discharge valves (fig.

223) should be set with one valve open and one

valve closed.

NOTE

The hull numbers 850o thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618 steering system is designed to use the flow

from both pumps. However, this system will

function with only one pump operating.

4-76. Filling Hydraulic Steering System with Fluid 

a. General. The hydraulic oil for this system should

be a high grade oil compounded for use in a hydraulic

system. Recommended oils are 2135 TH., MIL-17672B;

and 2075 TH., MIL17672B.

b. Filling Hydraulic Steering System, hull numbers

8500 thru 8519.

(1) Fill this system through the fill-vent cap in

the pilot house expansion tank. Open valves (fig. 2-16

and 2-27) at bottom of each tank and open the vent pet

cock on the storage tank (in engine room). Fill until oil

appears at the vent pet cock, then close it. Continue

filling the expansion tank until it is full (check sight glass).

(2) Open all ball valves in the system. Pre-fill

suction lines and pumps by loosening pump discharge

hoses at the union swivel. Turn pumps

4-65
TM 55-1905-217-12

1 Driven gear locknut 9. Oil filer and breather 17.Retainer 26 Special cover gasket

2.Driven gear lockwasher tube 18.Lockwasher 27. Drive shaft cover bolt

3.Drive gear bearing 10. Bolt 19. Bearing retainer bolt 28. Plain washer

(front) 11 Drive shaft cover gasket 20. Drive flange 29. Gear housing bolt

4. Power drive gear 12.Drive shaft cover 21 Drive flange retainer 30. Transfer gear housing

5. Drive gear bearing 13. Power driven shaft nut 31. Driven gear spacer

(rear) 14. Driven shaft bearing 22. Cotter pin 32. Power driven gear

6.Lockwasher 15.Driven shaft bearing 23.Special cover bolt 33. Driven shaft pilot roller

7. Gear housing bolt retainer oil seal 24. Washer bearing

8. Breather cap assembly 16.Bearing retainer gasket 25.Special cover

Figure 4-61. Power transfer assembly.

4-66
TM 55-1905-217-12

over slowly with engines idling, to draw oil into them.

When pumps have taken a suction, reconnect discharge

lines and close one ball valve in the pump discharge line.

This directs oil to the remainder of the hydraulic system.

Continue filling the expansion tank and venting the

storage tank throughout the filling operation.

(3) Oil levels will drop as lines, valves, and

cylinders become filled. Air displaced by the oil will collect

in the storage tank and must be vented off. Turn pumps

over at engine idling speed while continuing to purge the

system. When pumps and lines up to the helm unit

appear to be full, rotate the steering wheel from hardover

to hardover to work air out of cylinders and the lines

leading to the helm unit. Air may be removed from the

cylinders by backing off the air bleed Allen screws

located on the cylinder walls near the end caps. Air in the

hydraulic system will cause a spongy feeling in the helm,

noisy operation, and/or rapid fluctuation of oil level in the

expansion tank. Continue the above procedures to work

air out of the system. If air in the system persists, check

suction lines for air leaks.

(4) Check the return line filter (fig. 2-8.1) after

the system has been purged and operated for about 15

minutes. Replace the filter element if necessary.

(5) Clean suction strainer (in storage tank) after

the first 25 hours of operation. Pieces of metal or other

foreign matter should be investigated to determine their

source.

c. Filling Steering System, Hull Numbers 8520 thru

8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

(1) Filling procedures for the steering system on

hulls 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 are similar to

the procedures described in paragraph b for hulls 8500

thru 8519 craft. Hulls 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618

do not have an expansion tank in the pilot house. Filling

is done in the 12-gallon tank in the engine room. Check

level in the sight glass as the system is being filled.

(2) Hulls 8520 thru 8539 do not have ball

valves in the pump discharge lines. The output from both

steering pumps is used normally. If one pump should fail

or is not running, the check valve will prevent fluid from

reversing through the pump.

4-77. Steering System Filters and Strainers

a. Filters (Return Line). Refer to figure 2-8.1 for

service of return line filter.

b. Suction Strainer, Hull Numbers 8500 thru 8519.

(1) This strainer is located inside the 10gallon

storage tank in the engine room. See figure 2-16. The

shiner element should be removed and cleaned after the

first 25 hours and thereafter every 500 hours of

operation.

(2) Oil should be changed when the suction

strainer is cleaned. Continued coloration of the oil or

known contamination is cause for changing oil prior to

the regular interval.

(3) Drain oil from 10-gallon storage tank (fig. 2-16).

(4) Remove storage tank top cover. Turn

suction strainer retaining ring 1/8 turn to release element.

(5) Clean element thoroughly in solvent and

reinstall.

(6) Refer to paragraph 4-76 to refull steering

hydraulic system.

c. Suction Screens, Hull Numbers 8520 thru 8660

and 8580 thru 8618.

(1) These screens (2) are located in the

12gallon steering system storage tank in the engine

room. It is necessary to remove the top cover of the

storage tank for access to the screens. See figure 4-62.

(2) Drain oil and clean the screens every 200

hours.

(3) Refer to paragraph 4-76 to refill the steering

hydraulic system.

4-78. Steering System Pumps

a. General. Steering system pumps are

mounted aft on the outboard engine of each propulsion

unit. Pumps mounted on the starboard propulsion unit

are left-hand rotating as viewed from the shaft end of the

pump. Pumps for the port propulsion unit are right-hand

rotating. The pump made for the left-hand rotation is

identified by an "L" in the model code.

NOTE

Pumps must be driven in the direction of the

arrows cast on the pump ring. If it is desired to

change the direction of drive rotation, it is

necessary to reverse the ring.

b. Removal.

(1) Close suction line valve at tank (hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519).

4-67
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-62. Steering and ramp hoist hydraulic. system

tanks.

(2) Remove Inlet and outlet connections from

pump (fig. 4-63).

(3) Remove two attaching bolts and remove

pump.

NOTE

Steering pump)s for hull numbers 8500 thru

8519 and hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 Land

8580 thru 8618 are similar but not identical.

c. .Installation. Install pump In reverse order of

removal. Accurate positioning of the adapter gear on the

pump shaft is necessary for proper alinement of drive

components.

4-79. Steering Cylinders (fig. 4-64)

a General. Steering cylinders are mounted in the

lazarette with the rod ends attached to rudder post arms.

There are two ball valves in the lazarette for each

cylinder. The valves can be closed to isolate a cylinder in

case of failure.

b. Service (fig. 4-65). Steering cylinders normally

live no trouble other than excessive leakage-internal or

external. Tightening the "V" rod packing assembly will

usually stop external leakage. Should leakage persist,

examine the rod for scoring and/or replace seals Mild

scores or

Figure 4-63. Hydraulic steering pump.

nicks in rods call be removed by light stoning.

c.. Removal (fig. 4-64).

(1) Close hall valves for cylinder to be

removed.

(2) Disconnect cylinder hoses at cylinder.

(3) Remove pins at cylinder ends and remove

cylinder.

d . Installation. Install cylinder in reverse order of

removal.

e . Rudder Stop Adjustment Refer to figure 4-66 for

rudder stop locations.

4-80. Steering System Valve Adjustments (Hull

Numbers 8500 thru 8519)

a. General. Before adjusting the relief valve or the

double over-center valve, place a 0-2000 psi pressure

gage in the line between the flow control valve and the

helm unit. See figure 1-9.

4-68
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-64. Steering cylinder removal

b. Relief Valve (fig. 4-67). Adjust by putting the

helm hardover in either direction with engines running (1

pump only supplying system). Remove cap from the

relief valve, loosen nut, and back off screw until it no

longer bears on the spring. Hold the helm in a hardover

position and slowly turn down screw until the pressure

gage reads 1,500 psi indicating that the valve is relieving

at 1,500 psi. Lock this setting with nut and replace cap.

c. Flow Control Valve. This valve is preset at the

factory and cannot be adjusted.

d. Double Over-Center Valve (fig. 4-68). Adjust

with the screws. Loosen nuts and back off screws until

they no longer bear on springs. Rotate the helm and

slowly turn down screws until the pressure gage reads

150 psi indicating that a pressure of 150 psi is required to

open the over-center valve and start motion in the

cy1.inders. This operation must be performed ’first in one

direction, adjusting one side of the over-center valve,

then repeated for the other side. With the above setting

the over-center valve will resist a kick-back force from

the rudders equal to the force exerted by the cylinders at

1,500 psi. This adjustment must be made with the

cylinders at mid-stroke and the craft motionless in the

water so that no load is applied to the cylinders.

4-81. Steering System Valve Adjustments (HuIH1

Numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618)

See figure 1-9 or 1-10 for valve locations in system.

a. Relief Valve. This valve is to be set for a

maximum system pressure of 1050 psi. Refer to

paragraph 4-80b and figure 4-69 for adjusting procedure.

b. Flow Divider. This valve is a preset priority type

supplying a constant 2 gpm to the helm unit. Excess oil is

bled back to the reservoir.

c. Counterbalance Valves (2). The counterbalance

valves induce an artificial pressure on the low pressure

side of the steering cylinders to prevent the rudder from

running ahead of the pumps. See figure 4-70. These

valves are set at 1,000 psi.

4-82. Helm Unit and ’Steering Wheel

a. General. The helm unit and other valves control

the direction and volume of flow of the hydraulic oil in the

steering system. The helm unit directs the oil to one side

or the other of the cylinders and limits the flow according

to the speed at which the steering wheel is turned. In

event of pump failure the helm unit will also act as a

pump when turned manually.

b. Removal (fig. 4-71).

(1) Remove steering wheel.

(2) Remove access covers in pilot house panel.

(3) Clean the four tube connections at helm unit

with a solvent-wetted cloth so that contamination will not

enter the system.

(4) Disconnect the four tubes or hoses as

applicable from the helm unit

(5) Remove four mounting bolts and remove

helm unit.

c. Installation. Install helm unit in reverse order of

removal.

4-69
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Clevis pin 10. Bleeder ball 19. Ball check ball 28 V rod packing assembly

2. Rod wiper 11. Piston packing 20. Cap end cover 29. Rod bearing

3 Cartridge 12 Piston 21. Adjusting needle 30. Cartridge retainer

4. Cartridge slug 13 Tube 22. Lockscrew 31. Tie rod nut

5.Lockscrew 14,. Preformed packing 23. Tie rod 32. Tie rod nut

6 Cartridge ring 15. Ring 24. Preformed packing 33. Rod clevis

7. Cartridge packing 16. Preformed packing 25. Preformed packing

8 Packing retaining ring 17. Ball check screw 26. Head end cushion nose

9. Bleeder screw 18. Ball cheek spring 27. head end cover

Figure 4-65. Steering cylinder, sectional view.

4-70
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-66. Rudder stops installation, hull numbers

8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8818.

Figure 4-67. Relief valve adjustment, steering system,

hull numbers 8500 thru 8519.

Figure 4-68. Double over-center valves, steering system,

hull numbers 8500 thru 8519.

Figure 4-69. Relief valve, hull numbers 8540 thru 8660

and 8580 thru 8618.

Figure 4-70. Counterbalance valves, steering system,

hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 861R.

4-71
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-71. Helm unit removal

SECTION XVIII. POWER TAKE-OFF

4-83. General

The outboard engine of each propulsion unit is equipped

with a front-mounted power take-off (fig. 4-72) to drive the

hydraulic pumps for the ramp hoist system. Each power

take-off includes a lever operated clutch. A front end

power takeoff adapter supports the power take-off

assembly and surrounds the clutch and drive

mechanism. The adapter retains the crankshaft oil seal

and is bolted to the engine front end plate and cylinder

block.

4-84. Clutch Adjustment

When the clutch is properly adjusted, heavy pressure is

required at the outer end of the hand lever to move the

throw out linkage to the "over-center" or locked position.

Adjust clutch as follows:

a Disengage the clutch.

b Remove the inspection hole cover to expose the

clutch adjusting ring.

c Rotate the clutch, if necessary, to bring the

clutch adjusting ring lock within reach. See figure 4-73.

d Remove the clutch adjusting ring spring lock

screw and lock from the inner clutch pressure plate and

adjusting ring. Then, while hold

ing the clutch drive shaft to prevent the clutch from

turning, turn the clutch adjusting ring counterclockwise

and tighten the clutch until the desired pressure on the

outer end of the hand lever, or at the clutch release shaft

is obtained. Then, reinstall the clutch adjusting ring

spring lock, making sure the ends of the lock are in the

notches in the adjusting ring.

e. When the clutch is properly adjusting, the

approximate pressure required at the outer end of the

hand lever to engage the clutch is 55 lbs.

Figure 4-72. Power take-off.

4-72
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Cylinder block end plate 19. Roller bearing (inner) 36. Washer, coupling assem2 Vibration damper assem- 20. Grease fitting ’bly to crankshaft

bly (heavy) 21. Clutch drive shaft 37. Vibration damper to hub

3. Vibration damper assem- 22. Roller bearing (outer) bolt

bly (light) 23. Drive shaft bearing 38. Woodruff key

4. Accessory drive pulley retainer 39. Power take-off adapter

5. Clutch drive adapter 24. Clutch housing 40. Vibration damper hub

6. Clutch pressure plate 25. Clutch release yoke cone (front)

(outer) 26. Clutch release shaft 41. Vibration damper hub

7. Clutch facing (one piece) 27. Yoke to shaft bolt 42. Crankshaft oil ea

8. Clutch driving ring 28. Clutch release sleeve (front)

9. Clutch pressure plate 29. Adjusting ring wear 43. Crankshaft oil slinger

(inner) plate 44. Crankshaft

10. Clutch adjusting ring 30. Clutch housing bolt 45. Oil pump drive gear

11. Clutch hand lever 31. Clutch adjusting ring 46. Vibration damper hub

12. Clutch release lever spring lock cone

13. Grease fitting 32. Clutch driving ring bolt 47. Coupling and flange

14. Inspection cover 33. Drive adapter and pulley assembly

15. Clutch collar to coupling flange bolt 48. Adapter to cylinder

16. Grease fitting 34. Clutch drive shaft pilot block bolt

17. Retainer lock plate bolt bearing 49. Adapter to end plate bolt

18. Bearing retainer lock 35. Bolt 50. Adapter to end plate

plate gasket

Figure 4-73. Power take-off assembly, sectional view.

4-73
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION XIX. HYDRAULIC RAMP HOIST

4-85. General 

a. The ramp hoisting arrangement consists of a hoisting

cable deadended to one side of the craft, running through

fairlead sheaves through the ramp and to a winch on the

opposite side. The systems for hull numbers 8500 thru

8619 and hull numbers 8620 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618 are similar in operation but most components differ.

The winch on hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 is on the ,port

side and on hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and ’8580 thru

8618 the winch is on the starboard side.

b. Winches are powered by hydraulic motors.

Other system components include a four way control

valve, counterbalance valve, two engine driven pumps,

two check valves, suction line strainers, and return line

filters. See figure 1-12 for the hull numbers 8500 thru

8519 ramp system diagram, or figure 1-13 for the hull

numbers 8520 thru 8539 ramp system diagram, or figure

1-14.1 for hull numbers 8540 thru 8660 and 8580 thru

8618 ramp system diagram. Hull numbers 8540 thru

8560 and 8580 thru 8618 incorporate a closed hydraulic

system. Return hydraulic fluid from the counterbalance

valve is routed to the reservoir.

c. Emergency lowering of the ramp is accomplished

by a manual brake release on hull numbers 8500 thru

8’519 and by a hand operated hydraulic pump brake

release on hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618. Two chain hoists are stored in the l1azarette to be

used for emergency lifting of the ramp. See figure 2-9.

d. On hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618, a hydraulically actuated mechanical latch is

provided to secure the ramp in an up position. The latch

is unlocked by hydraulic pressure applied by placing the

ramp hoist lever (fig. 2-3) in the RAMP-DOWN position.

The latch is automatically locked when the ramp is

raised. The latch can be unlocked during emergency

conditions (no pressure in ramp hydraulic system

engines not operating, etc.) by ,applying hydraulic

pressure with the winch brake release hand pump,

located on the starboard side of the forward cargo hull. A

selector valve, located on the starboard side of the

forward cargo hull, selects the source of hydraulic

pressure for unlocking the ramp latch. In the NORMAL

position, pressure from the engine driven pumps is

applied to the latch. When in the EMERGENCY position,

the hydraulic pressure originates at the hydraulic ramp

system hand pump.

4-86. Filling Ramp Hoist Hydraulic System with Fluid

a. .Recommended oils are 2135 TH., MIL

,17672B; and 207.5 TH., MIl17672B.

b. The 76-gallon ramp hoist hydraulic system tank

is located in the engine room. FU the hydraulic system

through the tank filler. Open gate valve at bottom of tank

(hull numbers 8500 thru 8519). Fill tank until oil appears

at tank sight gage. Place control valve in neutral. Fill lines

and pumps by loosening pump discharge hoses at union

swivel. Tighten hoses when oil appears.

c. Turn pumps over slowly, with engines idling,

to draw oil into pumps. Oil level will drop as system fills.

Continue adding oil to tank throughout filling operation.

Continue purging air from system.

CAUTION

Air in system will cause spongy, erratic

operation of winch or rapid fluctuation of oil

level.

d. If air persists in system, check suction lines for

leak.

e. Run one pump approximately 15 minutes.

Shut down pump.

f. Remove and inspect filter and strainer; clean

strainer clement in either cleaning solvent Federal

Specification P-4D-80, type I, or kerosene, and replace

filter element if it is dirty. Repeat steps e and f until

strainers and filters remain clean.

CAUTION

if metal particles or other foreign matter are

found in filter or strainer, investigate to

determine source.

g. On hull numbers i840 thru 8560 and 8680 thru

8618, the ramp system is purged of air as described

above. Additionally, it is necessary to remove air from the

ramp latch system. This is done as follows: 

(1) With the ramp hoist cable disconnected from the

winch and one engine driven pump running, place the

ramp hoist control valve lever in the RAMP-DOWN

Edition.

(2) Loosen connection at selector valve from

engine driven pump, retighten when fluid is free of -

bubbles.

4-74
TM 55-1905-217-12

(3) With selector valve in normal position (IN).

Loosen connection tat each ramp locking cylinder,

retighten when fluid is free of bubbles.

(4) Disengage engine driven pump and place

sector valve in EMERGENCY position (OUT). Pump

hand pump to build up pressure.

(5) Loosen connection at selector valve from

hand pump, retighten when fluid is free of air bubbles.

(6) ’Return all controls to normal or neutral

position.

4-87. Ramp Hoist System Filters and Strainers 

a. Filters (Return Line). Observe the filter condition

indicator (fig. 2-9) daily when the system is in operation.

Filter elements must be changed when the needle moves

into the red danger zone. Change the elements only

when the ramp hoist pumps are not in operation.

b. Suction Strainer Service, Hull Numbers 8500

thru 8519. See figure 2-8.1.

(1) The strainer contains a reusable twin

element. A bypass valve opens as the element becomes

clogged, to allow fluid to flow without passing across the

element. A vacuum indicator shows a red sleeve to

indicate that fluid is bypassing the element. When the red

sleeve appears the elements must be cleaned.

(2) Close gage valve between filter and tank.

(3) Place a pan below the strainer to catch the

oil; then remove cover at bottom of strainer. Inspect seal

ring and replace if in poor condition. Clean cover

thoroughly.

(4) Carefully remove the element assembly.

Avoid striking the wire cloth against edges of filter

housing as wire cloth may be easily damaged.

(5) Place the element assembly, with flat end

down, on a flat surface. Reach through the top and open

conical end of the element sidewise, inner and outer

element assembly will come apart easily.

(6) Inspect housing and clean thoroughly.

(7) Place both inner and outer elements in a

container of clean solvent and al-low to soak ’long

enough to soften accumulated contaminant. A nonmetalic bristle brush may be used to remove caked

contaminant.

(8) When caked dirt has been thoroughly

removed, rinse element in clean solvent. If available, use

air hose to blow the element clean. When cleaning outer

element blow air from inside toward outside and when

cleaning the inner element, blow outside inward.

(9) Reassemble elements ,by installing the

outer element over the inner element, snapping it into the

flat end cap of the inner element and pressing together.

(10) Place conical shaped end member of the

element into the housing and carefully push the entire

filter assembly into the housing. Rotate element slightly

to ’be sure the conical shaped seal surface of the outer

element is properly seated.

(11) Install the cover seal, ’being careful that the

ring is in the correct position and is not twisted. Be sure

the element spring is securely fixed to spring retainer in

the center of the cover. Push the cover into place, being

sure the end member of the element is in its pocket.

Install bolts.

c. Suction Screen Service, Hull Numbers 8520 thru

8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

(1) These screens are located in the 75gallon

ramp hoist hydraulic system tank in the engine room. The

tank cover must be removed for access to the screens

which are attached to the suction lines ,near the bottom

of the tank.

See figure 4-62.

(2) Drain oil and clean the screens every 200

hours.

4-88. Ramp Hoist System Pumps

a. General. Power for the ramp hoist system is

supplied by two hydraulic pumps which are di4rect driven

by front power take-offs on the outboard engine of each

propulsion unit. Each -power take-off includes a manually

operated clutch. The system may be operated using one

or both pumps; however, both pumps are needed for

maximum rated winch speed.

b. Removal (fig. 4-74).

(1) Clean hose connections at pump,

disconnect lines, and cap open ends.

(2) -Remove pump coupling.

(3) Remove pump from support.

c. Installation. Install pump in reverse order of

removal. Align pump with power take-off shaft before

tightening mounting bolts.

4-89. Control Valve

a. General. Hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 and hull

numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 use similar,

but not identical, control valves for the ramp hoist

system. Hull numbers 8500 thru 8519 have a Vickers

CM2N02-jR20B-L-30 control valve which is mounted on

the pilot house on the port side. Hull numbers 8520 thru

8.560 and 8580 thru 8618 have a Vickers CM3-N02

4-75
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-74. Ramp hoist hydraulic pump.

R20BL valve mounted just below the deck in the engine

room. The control lever is on the starboard side of the

pilot house. The control valve used on hull numbers 8540

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 incorporates an internal

relief valve which limits system pressure to 2100 psi. See

figure 4-75 for control valve linkage installation details for

hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

b. Removal (fig. 4-76).

(1) Clean hose connections, disconnect, and

cap open ends. Tag hoses to assure proper

reconnection.

(2) Disconnect operating lever link (,hull

numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618).

(3) Remove mounting bolts and remove control

valve.

c. Installation. Install control valve in reverse order

of removal.

4-90. Winch (Hull Numbers 8500 thru 8519 (fig. 4-77)

The winch is mounted forward in the port side of the hull.

It is rated at 200 psi operating pressure, with a line pull of

14,2.50 pounds and a line speed of 100 feet per minute

at the first cable layer (bare drum). Hoist or lower time is

approximately 11 seconds. The winch -is driven by a

hydraulic motor through a double reduction gear reducer.

Cable is underwound on the winch.

ME 1905-217-12/4-75

Figure 4-75. Ramp hoist control valve linkage

installation, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618.

4-91. Winch (Hull Numbers 8520 thru 8539 (fig. 4-78))

The winch is located forward on the starboard aside of

the hull. Maximum line pull is 22,000 pounds at 1,900 psi.

The winch consists of a primary drive housing and a final

drive housing fastened to a winch base ’by dowel bolts

which hold the housings concentric. The primary drive

housing contains a hydraulic motor which drives the sun

gear of a primary planetary reduction.

4-92. Ramp Hoist Pump (Hull Numbers 6520 thru

8539)

a. General. See figure 2-26.1. The hand pump is

used only for emergency lowering of the ramp. Pressure

provided by the hand pump will release the winch brake

as controlled by the ball valve

b. Service. Oil level in the hand pump reservoir

should be approximately 2/8 full.

c. Removal.

(1) Clean pipe fitting and disconnect oil line.

(2) Remove mounting nuts and remove hand

pump.

d. Installation. Install hand pump in reverse order of

removal.

4-76

TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-76. Ramp hoist control valve.

Figure 4-77. Ramp winch, hull numbers 8500 thru 8519.

4-93. Relief Valve, Ramp Hoist System (Hull

Numbers 8500 thru 8519)

a. General. The main system relief valve is used

for system protection. It has an operating range of 1500-

,to 3000-Ipsi, but is normally adjusted to 2000, psi.

Figure 4-78. Ramp winch, hull numbers 8520 thru 8559.

b. Adjustment. See figure 4-79. If adjustment is

required proceed as follows:

(1) Install 3,000 psi pressure gage, with shutoff

valve, in system at tee fitting or port in relief valve.

(2) Wrap several turns of heavy manila rope

around winch drum and belay running end to prevent

operation of winch.

Figure 4-79. Ramp hoist system relief valve, hull

numbers 8500 thru 8519.

4-77
TM 55-1905-217-12

(3) Slowly open control valve to fully open

position and check indication on test gage. Pressure

should be no greater than 2,000 psi.

(4) Adjust pressure, if necessary, by rotating

adjusting screw on relief valve. Turn screw in

(clockwise) to increase pressure; turn out

(counterclockwise) to decrease pressure.

(5) Close shutoff valve at test gage to prevent

rapid and sudden pressure changes from damaging

gage.

c. Removal.

(1) Clean hose connections, disconnect hoses

from relief valve, and cap open ends.

(2) Remove relief valve.

d. Installation. Install relief valve in reverse order of

removal.

4-94. Counterbalance Valve, Ramp Hoist System

(Hull Numbers 8500 thru 8519)

a. General. This bypass and check valve is used

as an adjustable pressure bypass valve to maintain

sufficient pressure -in the pump circuit for operation of

the winch brake. It ensures positive control of ramp

lowering.

b. Adjustment. See figure 4-77 for counterbalance

valve location. Set counterbalance valve at 300 psi as

follows:

(1) Disconnect cable from winch to remove

load from system.

(2) Install 3,000 psi pressure gage, with shutoff

valve, in system at tee fitting or port in counterbalance

valve.

(3) Place control valve in position for lowering

pump.

(4) Adjust knob on top of valve until system

pressure is 300 psi. A pilot pressure of 800 psi will open

the counterbalance valve and allow the ramp to be

lowered.

4-95. Winch Brake Valve (Hull Numbers 8500 thru

8519)

a. General. See figure 4-77 for brake valve

identification. This is a spool-type, pressure-operated

valve which directs hydraulic fluid to the brake release

cylinder whenever pressure is applied to either port.

b. Removal.

(1) Clean tube connections, disconnect tubes

from valve, and cap open ends.

(2) Remove valve from winch.

c. Installation. Install brake valve, in reverse order

of removal.

4-96. Counterbalance Valve, Ramp Hoist System

(Hull Numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618)

a. General. This valve operates .automatically and

is designed to create artificial back pressure against the

winch motor to prevent the winch from falling

unrestricted. The relief should be set at 2,100 psi.

b. Adjustment. See figure 4-80 for counterbalance

valve location. Be certain that the relief is set at 2,100

psi by performing the following:

(1) Disconnect cable from winch to remove

load from system.

(2) Install 3,000 psi pressure gage, with shut

off valve, in system at tee fitting or port in counterbalance

valve.

(3) Place control valve in position for lowering

pump.

(4) Adjust knob on top of valve until system

pressure is 2,100 psi. A pilot pressure of 2,100 psi will

open the counterbalance valve and allow the ramp to be

lowered.

c. Removal. See figure 4-80. The valve is installed

in the hull near the winch.

(1) Clean pipe connections, disconnect pipe

from valve, and cap open ends.

(2) Remove valve.

c. Installation. Install valve in reverse order of

removal.

Figure 4-80. Counterbalance valve, ramp hoist system

hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

4-78
TM 55-1905-217-12

4-97. Ramp Locking Cylinder-(Hull Numbers 8540

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (fig. 4-81)

a. General. The ramp locking cylinders (one at

each side of the forward cargo well) provide a means of

locking the ramp in an up position. The cylinders have

an internal spring which returns the mechanism to a

locked position upon removal of hydraulic pressure. The

cylinders normally move to the unlocked position by

means of hydraulic pressure from the engine driven

ramp hydraulic pumps or in emergency from the winch

,brake release hand pump, located on the starboard side

of the forward cargo hull.

b. Removal. Remove either cylinder by the

following procedures

(1) Relieve pressure in the ramp hydraulic

system. As certain that ramp load binders are in place.

(2) Place ramp hoist control valve lever in

neutral position.

(3) Remove access cover on applicable side of

cargo hull.

(4) Disconnect hydraulic lines at cylinder cap

lines.

(5) Remove clevis between cylinder shaft and

mechanical lock.

(6) Remove cylinder mounting bolts and

remove cylinder.

(7) Tag ramp control lever to indicate removal

of cylinder.

c. Installation. Install either cylinder by the

following procedures:

(1) Ascertain that ramp load binders are in

place.

(2) Relieve pressure in ramp hydraulic system

and place ramp control valve in neutral position.

(3) With cylinder in place, install mounting

bolts. Torque to 71-75 foot pounds.

(4) Connect hydraulic line to cylinder.

(5) Connect cylinder shaft to mechanical lock

with clevis pin.

(6) Install access cover.

(7) Purge system of air and check for leaks.

4-98. Ramp Selector Valve (Hull Numbers 8540

thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (fig. 2-26.2)

a. General. In the normal position the upper shut

off valve is open and the lower shut off and liquid pump

bypass valves are closed. In these positions pressure

from the ramp system engine driver pumps is directed to

the ramp locking cylinders. In the emergency position

the upper shut off valve is closed, the lower shut off

valve is open and the hand pump bypass valve is closed.

In these positions pressure from the hand pump is

directed to the locking cylinders control ramp lowering by

opening and closing the hand pump bypass valve.

b. Removal. Remove the valve by the following

procedures:

(1) Ascertain that ramp load binders are in

position.

(2) Relieve pressure in the ramp hydraulic

system.

(3) Place ramp control valve in neutral position.

(4) Disconnect and cap hydraulic lines.

(5) Remove mounting bolts and valve.

(6) Tag ramp control valve lever to indicate

removal of valve.

c. Installation. Install the valve in revere order of

removal. Bleed the air from the system.

4-99. Winch Automatic Reversing Mechanism (Hull

Numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618 (fig. 4-82)

The above hull numbers incorporate an automatic winch

reversing mechanism. The mechanism, attached to the

ramp winch, prevents cable overrun and coiling when the

ramp lowering cycle is completed or interrupted. When

the cable goes slack, the direction of rotation is

automatically reversed.

Change 1 4-79
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-81. Ramp locking cylinder, hull number 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

4-80
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-82. Winch automatic reversing mechanism, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

SECTION XX. BILGE PUMP SYSTEM

4-100. Bilge Pump System

Refer to paragraph 27 for description of bilge pump

system. The system is illustrated in figure 2-14.

4-101. Bilge Pumps

a. General. Each landing craft has three bilge

pumps. Two are belt-driven from the inboard engine of

the port propulsion unit and the other

4-81
TM 55-1905-217-12

pump is belt-driven from the inboard engine of the

starboard propulsion unit. See figure 4-83. See figure 3-12

 for bilge pump installation on hull numbers 8540 thru

8560 and 8580 thru 8618. These pumps have a single

moving part, the impeller and shaft assembly. Only one

grease cup requires attention. See lubrication order.

The grease cup provides lubrication for the bronze

bushing on impeller end of shaft. Ball bearing at other

end of shaft is grease-pack and requires no attention.

b. Packing Gland Adjustment. Do not tighten more

than necessary to stop leakage of water. Repack when

necessary with 1/8-inch metallic string packing.

c. Pump Removal (fig. 4-83).

(1) Close primer line valve and suction valve.

(2) Loosen hose clamps and slide hoses away

from pump.

(3) Loosen mounting bolt nuts and remove belt.

(4) Remove mounting bolts and remove pump.

d. Disassembly (fig. 4-84).

(1) Remove the pump housing from the clutch

body by removing the six attaching nuts and, washers.

Remove carefully to protect gasket.

(2) Remove end nut and clamp washer from

the clutch end of unit and press or drive out the shaft and

impeller assembly from ball bearing and while supporting

the clutch body. When the shaft is being removed, look

for spacing shim before pulling the shaft through the

packing and gland as shim will be damaged if left on the

shaft.

(3) To remove ball bearing, first remove the

packing and gland. Remove the bearing snap retaining

rings and insert a brass drift through the -housing end to

the inner race of the bearing. Tap the drift lightly and

remove the bearing. The impeller should not be

removed from the shaft.

e. Inspection and Repair.

(1) Inspect impeller housing and pressure plate

for excessive wear.

(2) Inspect shaft for wear, scores, or burrs.

Inspect impeller for wear or damage.

(3) Inspect packing glands for serviceability.

(4) Remove burrs by careful stoning or lapping.

Round out nicks and uneven edges on impeller. Fit new

parts to replace defective items. If impeller is damaged,

a new shaft assembly is required.

Figure 4-83. Bilge pump removal

f. Reassembly.

(1) Reassemble in reverse order of

disassembly.

(2) After ’pump has been assembled and nuts

tightened, check clearance between face of impeller and

housing. The clearance shall be 0.010-to 0.012iinch and

is controlled by the number of gaskets between housing

and body. Check the clearance between the back face

of the impeller and the clutch body. The clearance shall

be 0.010-to 0.015-inch and -is controlled by shim

thickness at shaft shoulder.

(3) Shaft bearings are packed and do not

require lubrication.

g. Installation. Install pump in reverse order of

removal.

4-102. Strainers and Lines

Locations of lines and strainers are indicated in, figure 2-14.

 No service is required except inspection of strainers

to be sure they are free from debris. Figure 4-85 depicts

a typical foot valve installation used on hull -numbers

8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

4-103. Fuel Oil Heat Exchangers Hull 8540 Thru

8618)

a. General. The fuel oil heat exchangers are

vertically mounted in the raw water cooling lines -for

each engine muffler. The exchangers cool the surplus

fuel returning from the outlet side of the injector back to

the fuel tank.

4-82
TM 55-1905-217-12

 Figure 4-84. Bilge pump, exploded view, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

Page 4-84
TM 55-1905-217-12

1. Pin 11. Bearing 21. Stud 31. Key2. Lock Spring 12. Pulley 22. Washer 32. Washer3. Cotter 13. Pressure plate 23. Nut 33. Nut4. Washer 14. Hub, short 24. Drain lug 34. Body5. Adjusting 15. Key 25. Housing 35. Snap Ring6. Lever 16. Packing, solid 26. Stud 36. Bearing7. Collar assembly 17. Packing service 27. Gasket 37. Spacer8. Levers and rollers 18. Packing gland 28. Pin 38. Bearing9. Hub, long 19. Slinger 29. Impeller 39. Clamp washer10. Pressure plate 20. Shim 30. Shaft 40. NutFigure 4-84. Continued.4-85
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 4-85. Bilge system foot valve, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

b. Removal.

(1) Close fuel oil valve from the fuel tank (in

Lazarette).

(2) Disconnect top and bottom hoses from fuel

oil heat exchangers.

(3) Drain fuel oil from the heat exchangers.

(4) Remove clamps and hoses at the top of the

heat exchangers that connect to the raw water line.

(5) Apply heat to the solder around the bottom

of the heat exchanger until the heat exchanger can be

freed from the raw water line.

c. Installation. Resolder heat exchanger to the raw

water line and reconnect hoses and clamps.

SECTION XXI. HULL

4-104. General

A steel hull is subject to both mechanical and corrosive

deteriorating forces. Mechanical forces include normal

twisting and vibrations, as well as more violent events

such as collisions, grounding, and explosions. These

forces can weaken and loosen rivets end welded seams

in the hull and damage frames ad plates. All vessels that

contain metal are subject to deterioration by electrolytic

corrosion or electrolysis. This chemical re .action exists

naturally where two underwater metals of different

chemical composition are connected electrically, which

causes the wasting *way, or going into solution, of one

of the metals. Zinc or magnesium protective anodes (fig.

S16) are used to prevent corrosion of the hull.

Electrolysis can also occur when the ship’s

battery is connected between two underwater pals

through error. The inspection and correction of stray

electrical current will aid in the reduction of damage by

electrical corrosion.

4-105. Inspection and Repair

a. Hull. The hull of the landing craft should be

inspected for leaks, punctures, cracks, dirt, and rust.

The paint should be checked for flaking, chipping, and

peeling.

b. Ramp. The ramp surfaces should be checked

for damage and deterioration. Check for leaks around

the ramp when the landing craft is afloat.

c. Hatches and Deck Port. Inspect hatches and

deck ports for damage. Inspect gaskets for

deterioration. Replace unserviceable items.

4-86
TM 55-1905-217-12

d. Ladders. Inspect bolts on access ladders for

t1rtness. Tighten or replace loose bolts.

e. Ramp Load Binders. Check ramp load binders

and pulleys for mechanical weaknesses and corrosion.

Replace unserviceable items.

f. Cargo Cover. Inspect the cargo cover for tears.

Replace torn cover. Treat canvas cover with canvas

preservative.

g. Data Plates. Inspect all data plates for dirt, rust,

and legibility. Clean and/or replace the plates as

neccessary.

4-106. Painting

Paint all surfaces where paint has been removed or

damaged. Refer to TB 746-984 for detailed cleaning and

painting instructions.

4-87
TM 55-1905-217-12

CHAPTER 5

MATERIAL USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MAJOR ITEM

SECTION I. FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

5-1. Fire Extinguishers

There are four fire extinguishers on each craft. Refer to

paragraph P28 for their locations.

5-2. Inspections

The fire extinguishers will be inspected according to

instructions contained in TB 5-4200-200-10.

SECTION II. COMMUNICATION AND NAVIGATIONAL EQUIPMENT

5-3. Communication Equipment (Hull Numbers

9540 thru 8560 and 6580 thru 861 B)

a. General. This equipment will be operated and

maintained in accordance with applicable technical

manuals (Appendix A). Refer to Appendix C for

maintenance allocation.

b. Static Isolation Equipment. The static is isolation

equipment is in the static isolation cabinet located

outside of the pilot house, against the pilot house aft

bulkhead. Input power from the 24-volt battery assembly

in the engine room is protected by a 12 ampere 24-volt

dc circuit breaker (also located in the engine room).

c. Radio Sets. The radio sets are looted in the

radio cabinet built into the port side of the pilot

house. See figures 5-1 and 5-2 for location and

identification of the specific communication equipment

that can be installed.

5-4. Navigational Equipment (Hull Numbers 9540

thru &560 and W590 thru 8618)

a. General. The Remote Magnetic Heading

System includes an induction compass transmitter

located on the mast support, and a heading indicator

located in the pilot house. Both assemblies are seated

and require no maintenance.

b. Inspection. Inspect heading indicator and

induction campus transmitter case for physical damage.

Inspect interconnect cables for excessive wear and

breakage. Inspect terminal boxes for loose terminals.

5-1
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 5-1. Communications equipment (AN/VRC-46 AND AN/SRC-32, hull numbers8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

5-2
TM 55-1905-217-12

Figure 5-2. Communication equipment (AN/VRC-47 and AN/GRC-106, hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618.

5-3
TM 55-1905-217-12

APPENDIX A

REFERENCES

A-1 Fire Protection

TB 5-4200-200-10 Hand Portable Fire Extinguishers Approved for Army Users

A-2 Lubrication

LO 55-1905-217-12/1 Landing Craft, Mechanized; steel; Diesel-Power Driven, 74 Ft. Lg. Hull

Numbers LCM 8500 thru LCM 8519

LO 55-1905.-217-12/2 Landing Craft, Mechanized; Steel; Diesel-Power Driven, 74 Ft. Lg. Hull

Numbers LCM 8-520 thru LCM 8560 and Hull Numbers LCM 8580 thru

LCM 8618

LO 55 1905-217-12/3 Landing Craft, Mechanized; Steel; Diesel-Power Driven, 74 Ft. Lg. Propulsion Unit, (Detroit Diesel Models 12005A and 12006A) Hull Numbers LCM 8500 thru LCM 8560 and Hull Numbers 8580 thru 8618

A3 Painting

TB 746-9-4 Painting of Vessels

A-4 Maintenance

TB 750-651 Use of Antifreeze Solutions arid Cleaning Compounds in Engine Cooling

System

TM 9-6140-200-15 Operational and Organizational Field and Depot Maintenance Storage

BT0tterlies, Lead-Acid Type

TM 11-5820-399-35 Direct and General Support and Depot Maintenance Manual, Receivertransmitter RT-246/VRC and RT-524/VRC

TM 11-5820-401-10 Operator Manual Radio Sets AN/ViRC-46 and AN/VRC-47

TM 11-5820-409-35 Direct and General Support and Depot Maintenance Manual, Receiver,

Radio R-4421/VRC

TM 11-5820-520-12 Operator and Organizational Manual, Radio Set AN/GRC-106

TM 11-5820-520-35 Direct and General Support and Depot Maintenance Manual, Radio Set

AN/GRC-106

TM 11-5820-689-15 Operator and General Support, and Depot Maintenance Manual, Radio

Set AN/SRC32-

DA Pam 738-750 The Army Maintenance Management System (Tamms)

TM 55-1905-217-20P Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tool List

TM 55-1905-217-34P Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools list

TM 55-1905-217-34 Direct Support and Central Support Maintenance Manual

A-5 Shipment and Storage

TB 740-93-4 Preservation of Vessels for storage

TB 740-97-2 Preservation of USAMEC Mechanical Equipment for Shipment and Storage

TM 740-93-3 Administrative Storage of Equipment

A-6 Demolition to Prevent Enemy Use

TM 750-244-3 Procedure for Destruction of Equipment to Prevent Enemy Use

Change 5 A-1/(A-2 blank)
TM 55-1905-217-12

APPENDIX B. CREW/OPERATOR BOAT SET LIST,

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII), ACCESSORY LIST,

AND ON-BOARD REPAIR PARTS

SECTION I. INTRODUCTION

B-1. SCOPE. This appendix lists basic issue items for the Landing Craft, Mechanized, Mark VIII (LCM-8) to help you

inventory the items for safe and efficient operation of the equipment

B-2. GENERAL. These items are part of the LCM-8. As part of the end item, these items must be with the end item

during operation and whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts. These essential items are required

to place the LCM-8 in operation, operate it, and to do emergency repairs. Listing items is your authority to

request/requisition them for replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE/MTOE. The Basic Issue

Items (Bll) Lists are divided into the following sections:

a. Section II, Operating Equipment.

b. Section III, Operating Supplies.

c. Section IV, On-Board Repair Parts.

d. Section V, Accessory Equipment

e. Section VI, Firefighting, Safety, and Damage Control Items.

B-3. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS.

a. Column (1), Illustration Number; Not applicable.

b. Column (2), National Stock Number, identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning

purposes.

c. Column (3), Description and Useable On Code, identifies the Federal item name (in all capital letters)

followed by a minimum description when needed. The last line below the description is the CAGEC (commercial and

Government entity code) (in parenthesis) and the part number.

d. Column (4), U/I (unit of issue), indicates how the item is issued for the National Stock Number shown in

column two.

e. Column (5), Qty Rqr, indicates the quantity required.

SECTION II. OPERATING EQUIPMENT

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ILLUS NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION, Usable U/I QTY

NUMBER NUMBER CAGEC and Part Number On Code rqr

75100-889-3494 BINDER, Equipment Log Book EA 1

(81349) B-43064

5120-00-529-4124 CARRIER, Battery, Hand (81349) EA 1

C-19482

2040-00-565-9145 FENDER, Maine, 18" Dia. x 36'’ EA 8

Long (14348) Fendaire

8345-00-245-2040 FLAG, National, U.S., 1',6' x 2'2" EA 1

(81348) DD-F-416, Type III,

Class 2

Change 7 B-1
TM 55-1905-217-12

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ILLUS NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION, Usable U/I QTY

NUMBER NUMBER CAGEC and Part Number On Code rqr

8345-00-375-0221 FLAG SET, Semaphore, M113 EA 1

(81349) F-40050

6230-00-264-8261 FLASHLIGHT, Watertight, 2 Cell EA 1

(81349) F-3747

4240-00-052-3776 GOGGLES, Plastic, Safety (81348) EA 3

GG-G-531

4930-00-253-2478 GREASE GUN, Hand, 16 Oz EA 1

(81349) G-3859

5120-00-224-4111 HAMMER, Scaling, Hand, 1 lb. EA 2

(81348) GGG-H-86

6630-00-171-5126 TESTER, Battery (81348) EA 1

GG-T-258, GSAFSS

6545-00-922-1200 KIT, FIRST AID, General Purpose, EA 1

12 Units (33333) NOREF

6230-00-781-3189 LANTERN, Electric, 6V, w/o relay EA 2

(96906) 100-2

5120-00-293-1039 LIFTER, Scraper, Battery EA 1

(74267)177

4930-00-266-9182 OILER, Hand, 8 Oz (81348) EA 1

GGG-591

5120-00-372-0652 PULLER, Propeller (72201) Fig. 802, EA 1

Size 3

4320-00-574-7645 PUMP, Reciprocating, Hand (Engine EA 1

Sump) (46643) 3799

5120-00-278-1280 SCREWDRIVER, Flat, 8 in (81348) EA 1

GGG-S-121

5180-00-629-9783 TOOL KIT, General Mechanics EA 1

(50980) SC5180-90-CL-N28

8465-00-254-8803 WHISTLE, Life Jacket, w/Lanyard EA 16

(81349) W-1053

5120-00-277-1575 WRENCH, Box, Prop Nut (81348) EA 1

GGG-W-636

5120-00-277-1576 WRENCH, Box, Shaft Nut (81348) EA 1

GGG-W-636

5120-00-712-0517 WRENCH, Fuel Sounding Tube EA 1

(80064) LCM-8 S55D1 H1387536

Change 7 B-2
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION III. OPERATING SUPPLIES

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ILLUS NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION, Usable U/I QTY

NUMBER NUMBER CAGEC and Part Number On Code rqr

6135-00-050-0915 BATTERY, Battle Lantern EA 2

(80063) BA-23

6135-00-120-1020 BATTERY, Flashlight (80063) BA-30 EA 6

(See Note E)

7920-00-291-8305 BROOM, Upright, Corn (81348) EA 1

A-B-51

792-00-240-6358 BRUSH, Dusting, Bench (81348) EA 1

H-B-190

7920-00-291-5815 BRUSH, Wire, Curved Handle EA 1

(81348) H-B-178

7240-00-256-7700 CAN, Flammable Waste, 10 Gal. EA 1

(81348) RR-114

5110-00-222-2117 CHISEL Round, 1/4 in. (81348) EA 1

GGGC-313

5110-01-242-3457 CHISEL, Cold, 3/8 in. (81348) EA 1

GGGC-313

7920-00-224-8308 DUST PAN, (81348) RR-D-800 EA 1

7240-00-527-9868 FUNNEL, w/Strainer, 1 qt. capacity, EA 1

(81348) RR-F-800, Type I, Class B,

Style 2

7920-00-267-1218 HANDLE, Mop, Wood (81348) EA 1

NN-H-101

7240-00-2336025 MEASURE, Liquid, 1 Gal. (81348) EA 1

RR-M-1 90

7920-00-171-1148 MOPHEAD, Cotton (81348) EA 1

T-M-561

7240-00-160-0455 PAIL, Metal, 3-1/2 gal. (81348) EA 1

RR-P-35

Change 7 B-3
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION IV. ON BOARD REPAIR PARTS

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

SMR NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION, Usable U/I QTY

Code NUMBER CAGEC and Part Number On Code rqr

All Hulls EA 1

ENGINE, Diesel, Detroit EA 1

Model 12005ARHSTBDCW EA 1

Model 12006APORTCCW EA 1

Fuel Strainer, Primary Engine EA 1

PACZZ 5300-00-599-4823 WASHER, Non-metallic, Cover EA 4

5193704 (72582)

PACZZ 5330-00-364-2674 GASKET, Plug 694203 (72582) EA 4

Fuel Filter Secondary

PACZZ 2910-00-287-1912 ELEMENT, Fuel Filter MIL-E-20627 EA 8

(81349)

PACZZ 5330-00-285-3825 GASKET, Cover Nut 2243465 EA 8

(72582)

PACZZ 5330-00-627-4085 GASKET, Filter Shell 5192801 EA 8

(72582)

Lube Oil Filter, Engine

PACZZ 2940-00-480-6283 ELEMENT, Filter PF132, 5573014 EA 4

(72582)

PACZZ 5330-00-290-7860 WASHER, Non-Metallic, Shell EA 4

5571024 (72582)

PACZZ 5330-00-604-8094 PACKING, Preformed, Cover Nut EA 4

5187310 (72582)

Marine Gear Oil Filter

PACZZ 2940-00-019-087 ELEMENT, Filter, Oil 5574978 EA 4

(72582)

PACHH 2010-00-540-7689 PROPELLER, Ship, LH EA 1

PACHH 12010-00-540-7690 PROPELLER, Ship, RH EA 1

PACZZ 5330-00-290-7860 WASHER, Non-Metallic, Shell EA 4

5571024 (72582)

PACZZ 2940-00-841-5964 GASKET, Oil Filter, Cover Bolt EA 4

5574130 (72582)

Change 7 B-4
TM 55-1905-217-12

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

SMR NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION, Usable U/I QTY

Code NUMBER CAGEC and Part Number On Code rqr

Transmission Oil Strainer

PACZZ 5330-00-786-5320 GASKET, Oil Strainer Cover 5112511 EA 4

(72582)

Sea Water Strainer

PACZZ 2040-00-929-8730 GASKET Cylinder 10 (72922) EA 4

Alternator

PACZZ 3030-0529-0479 BELT, V, At Drive MS39256B51 EA 2

(96906)

Bilge Pump

PACZZ 3030-00-529-0482 BELT, V, Pump Drive (R200) EA 1

MS39256B42 (96906)

PACZZ 3030-00-460-2502 BELT, V, Pump Drive (R&L130) EA 1

MS39256B58 (96906)

Electrical Control Panel

PACZZ 5920-00-686-9548 FUSE, Cartridge 10A FO9A250V1OA EA 8

(81349)

PACZZ 5920-00-280-3163 FUSE, Cartridge 15A FO7A32V15A EA 4

(81349)

Remote Magnetic Heading System

(RMHS)

PACZZ 5920-00-296-0445 FUSE, Cartridge 5A F06C500V5A EA 2

(81349)

SECTION V. ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT

NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION U/I Qty

NUMBER FSCM AND PART NUMBER rqr

2040-00377-8599 ANCHOR, Marine, 75 lb (81349) A-1 570718 EA 1

6140-00-184-3415 BATTERY, Storage, Engine Starting, 6V (81348) EA 4

W-B-131, Type 7D

6350-00-256-9061 I BELL, Ship, 20 lb (81349) B-674 EA 1

4010-00-555-9510 CHAIN ASSEMBLY, Anchor, 3/8 in. (81349) EA 1

C-2683

Change 7 B-5
TM 55-1905-217-12

NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION U/I Qty

NUMBER FSCM AND PART NUMBER rqr

4020-00-022-2946 EAR PROTECTOR, MIL-P-38268 (81349) ST 6

4210-00-889-2491 EXTINGUISHER, FIRE, Dry Chemical, 10 lb., EA 4

ABC, USCG Approved (81348) O-E-915C

Remote Magnetic Heading System (RMHS)

6605-00-106-9560 INDICATOR, Repeater, Heading EA 1

(07187) 2593843-901

6605-00-106-9562 TRANSMITTER, Indicator, Compass EA 1

(07187) 2590057-901

3950-00-235-4239 HOIST, Chain, (Ramp Emergency Closing) EA 1

(81349) H-904, Class 1 or 2, Type H, Style 1

2040-00--268-9250 HOOK, Boat, Wood, 10f(81348)H-3496 EA 2

KEY, Adjustable, Deck Plates, AN Figure 826 EA 3

(46576)

4220-00-2000538 LIFE PRESERVER, Vest, Adult (81349) EA 6

MIL-L-10845, Type 1

6260-01-086-8077 LIGHT, MARKER, Distress, Life Preserver EA 16

(81349) L-573, Type II, Class I

6230-00-782-0643 LIGHT, MARKER, Distress, Ring Buoy (80064) EA 2

815-119249 Symbol 289

4220-00-275-3157 RING, BUOY, Floating, 30 in. od, w/Line (81349) EA 3

R-16847

* Rope, Nylon; Mooring Line, Required, EA 2

48 ft. long, Manufacture from NSN

4020-X)-752-8878 (81349) R-1 7343

* Rope, Nylon; Mooring Line, Required, EA 2

18 ft. long, Manufacture from NSN

4020-00-752-8878 (81349) R-1 7343

* Rope, Nylon; Mooring Line, Required, EA 1

90 ft. long, Manufacture from NSN

4020-00-752-8878 (81349) R-1 7343

* Rope, Nylon; Anchor Line, Required, EA 1

450 ft. long, Manufacture from NSN

4020-00-752-8878 (81349) R-1 7343

8340-00-753-6438 TARPAULIN, No. 6, Cargo Cover EA 1

(Deleted)

* Note E - - The quantity and unit of issue shown for this item denotes the maximum required for this set and does

not conform to the standard package or authorized unit of issue.

Change 7 B-6
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION VI. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST

Firefighting, Safely, and Damage Control Items

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Item NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION, Usable U/I QTY

Number NUMBER CAGEC and Part Number On Code rqr

4220-0276-8926 Buoyant Vest, Work Type EA 6

N/A Bum Dressing Kit: * Contains: EA 1

8’' x 18’’ Dressing EA 2

4’’x 16’’ Dressing EA 1

4" x 4'’ Dressing EA 4

12’' x 16’’ Face Mask Dressing EA 2

Burn-Jel Topical Dressing PK 1

* Ordering location:

Water-Jel AWK Kit

H & H Associates, Inc.

P.O. Box 4469

Alexandria, VA 22303

Phone: 1800326-5708

N/A Coverall, Anti-exposure,

Sterns Model 1 FS-580, Orange ** EA 4

** Ordering Information:

Lifesaving Systems Corp.

720 4th SL SW, Rusldn, FL

33570-1829

Phone: (813) 645-2768

4240-01-116-9888 Emergency Escape Breathing Device

(EEBD) EA 1

N/A Emergency Position Indicating Radio EA 1

Beacon (EPIRB), Category 1, 406 MHz

Satellite, F.C.C. Approved (No NSN, Local

Purchase Item)

4240-00-542-2048 Face Shield, Industrial, Tilting EA 1

4210-00-142-4949 Fire Ax EA 1

N/A Fire Blanket, 72' x 6 *** EA 1

*** Ordering Information:

Water-Jel AWK Fire Blanket

H & H Associates, Inc.

P.O. Box 4469

Alexandria, VA 22303

Phone: 1 -800-326-5708

8345-00-935-0445 Flag, Signal, ‘'A’' Intn'l Code, Size 6 EA 1

(81349) MIL-F-2692

8345-00-926-6803 Flag, Signal, ‘’B’’ Intn'l Code, Size 6 EA 1

(81349) MIL-F-2692

8345-00-935-0451 Flag, Signal, "O’’ Intn'l Code, Size 6 EA 1

(81349) MIL-F-2692

Change 7 B-7
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION VI. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST

Firefighting, Safety, and Damage Control Items

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Item NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION, Usable U/I QTY

Number NUMBER CAGEC and Part Number On Code rqr

8345q30-926-6814 Flag, Signal, ’U" Intn’l Code, Size 6 EA 1

(81349) MIL-F-2692

8345-00-935-0455 Flag, Signal, V’ Intn’l Code, Size 6 EA 1

(81349) MIL-F-2692

834540-935-0456 Flag, Signal, Intn’l Code, Size 6 EA 1

(81349) MIL-F-2692

4240-01-258-1245 Fountain, Eye and Face Wash, Portable,

16Gallons EA 1

6840-01-315-9841 Bacteriostatic Additive (Eye & Face

Wash Fountain) BX 1

8415-01-267-9661 Gloves, Anti-Flash PR 6

4240-00-190-6432 Goggle, Industrial, No Vents, (Chemical EA 1

Splash)

8465-01-004-2893 Goggles, Safety, Wind, Dust, Sand, Spray EA 4

8415-00-935-3136 Hard Hat, Orange EA 3

8415-00-935-3139 Hard Hat, White EA 1

4240-00-022-2522 Harness, Safety, Torso EA 2

8415-01-268-3473 Hood, Anti-Rash EA 6

4240-00-022-2518 Lanyard, Harness, Safety, Torso EA 2

4020-01-344-0552 Line, Heaving, Safety, 100’ EA 2

5120-00-255-1476 Maul, Ship’s, 5 lb. EA 1

(Damage Control Plugs)

5510-00-260-8953 Plug, Soft Wood 1’' x 0’’ x 3" Long EA 5

5510-00-260-8962 Plug, Soft Wood 3’' x 0’’ x 8’' Long EA 10

5510-00-260-8969 Plug, Soft Wood 7’' x 3’' x 10’’, Long EA 5

2090-00-058-3737 Shoring, Steel, Adjustable, Short 3' to 5' EA 1

2090-00-052-1581 Shoring, Steel, Adjustable, Long 6' to 11' EA 1

1370-01-030-8330 Signal, Distress, Orange Smoke, Red EA 12

Illumination

9390-01-078-8660 Tape, Retroreflective, 3’' x 50 yds Long RL 1

5510-00-268-3479 Wedge, Plug, Tapered, Hardwood 2" x 2" x

8" Long EA 6

5510-00*268-3475 Wedge, Shoring, Tapered, Hardwood

1-1/2’’ x 2’' x 2" Long EA 6

Change 7 B-8
TM 55-1905-217-12

APPENDIX C

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

SECTION I. INTRODUCTION

C-1. General

a. This section provides a general explanation of all

maintenance and repair functions authorized at various

maintenance levels.

b. Section II designates overall responsibility for the

performance of maintenance functions on the identified

end item or component. The implementation of the

maintenance functions upon the end item or component

will be consistent with the assigned maintenance

functions.

c. Section III lists the special tools and test

equipment required for each maintenance function as

referenced from Section II.

d. Section IV contains supplemental instructions,

explanatory notes, and/or illustrations required for a

particular maintenance function.

C-2. Maintenance Functions

Maintenance functions shall be limited to and defined as

follows:

a. Adjust. Maintain within prescribed limits by

bringing into proper or exact position, or by setting the

operating characteristics to the specified parameters.

b. Align. To adjust specified variable elements of

an item to bring about optimum or desired performance.

c. Calibrate. To determine and cause corrections

to be made or to be adjusted on instruments or test

measuring and diagnostic equipment used in precision

measurement. Consists of comparisons of two

instruments, one of which is a certified standard of

known accuracy, to detect and adjust any discrepancy in

the accuracy of the instrument being compared.

d. Inspect. To determine the serviceability of an

item by comparing its physical, mechanical, and/or

electrical characteristics with established standards

through examination.

e. Install. The act of emplacing, seating, or fixing

into position an item part, module, component, or

assembly in a manner to allow the proper functioning of

the equipment/system.

f. Overhaul. That maintenance effort

(service/action) necessary to restore an item to a

completely serviceable/operational condition as

prescribed by maintenance standards (e.g., DMWR) in

pertinent technical publications. Overhaul is normally the

highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army.

Overhaul does not normally return an item to like new

condition.

g. Rebuild. Consists of those services/actions

necessary for the restoration of equipment to a like-new

condition in accordance with original manufacturing

standards. Rebuild is the highest degree of materiel

maintenance applied to Army equipment. The rebuild

operation includes the act of returning to zero those age

measurements (hours, miles, etc.) considered in

classifying Army equipment/components.

h. Repair. The application of maintenance

services (inspect, test, service, adjust, align, calibrate,

replace) or other maintenance actions (welding, grinding,

riveting, straightening, facing, remachining, or

resurfacing) to restore serviceability to an item by

correcting specific damage, fault, malfunction, or failure

in a part, subassembly, module, component, assembly,

end item, or system.

i. Replace. The act of substituting a serviceable

like-type part, subassembly, module, component, or

assembly in a manner to allow the proper functioning of

an equipment system.

j. Service. Operations required periodically to

keep an item in proper operating condition, i.e., to clean,

preserve, drain, paint, or to replenish fuel, lubricants,

hydraulic fluids, or compressed air supplies.

k. Test. To verify serviceability and to detect

incipient failure by measuring the mechanical or

electrical characteristics of an item and compar-

 C-1
TM 55-1905-217-12

ing those characteristics with prescribed standards.

l. Symbols. The uppercase letter placed in the

appropriate column indicates the lowest level at which

that particular maintenance function is to be performed.

C3. Explanation of Format

Purpose and use of the format are as follows:

a. Column (1), Group Number. Column 1 lists

group numbers, the purpose of which is to match

components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules

with the next higher assembly.

b. Column (2), Functional Group. Column 2 lists

the next higher assembly group and the item names of

components, assemblies, subassemblies and modules

within the group for which maintenance is authorized.

c. Column (3), Maintenance Function. Column 3 lists

the maintenance functions defined in C-2 above. Each

maintenance function required for an item shall be

specified by the symbol among those listed in d below

which indicates the level responsible for the required

maintenance. Under this symbol there shall be listed an

appropriate work measurement time value determined

as indicated in e below.

d. Use of symbols. The following symbols shall be

used to prescribe work function responsibility:

C - Operator/Crew

O - Organization

F - Direct Support

H - General Support

D - Depot

e. Work Measurement Time. The active repair time

required to perform the maintenance function is included

directly below the symbol identifying the level of

maintenance. Active repair time is the average

aggregate time required to restore an item

(subassembly, assembly, component, module, end item

or system) to a serviceable condition under typical field

operating conditions. This time includes preparation

time, fault isolation/diagnostic time, and QA/QC time in

addition to the time required to perform specific

maintenance functions identified for the tasks authorized

in the maintenance allocation chart. This time is

expressed in man-hours and carried to one decimal

place (tenths of hours).

f. Column 4, Tools and Equipment. This column

shall be used to specify, by code, those tools and test

equipment required to perform the designated function.

g. Column 5, Remarks. Self-explanatory.

C-2
TM 55-1905-217-12

(1) (2) (3) (4) 

GROUP MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS TOOLS AND 

NUMBER FUNCTIONAL GROUP A B C D E F G H I J K EQUIPMENT

01 Air Inlet Silencer------------------------------ C-- ------ -- O-- ------ --- ---------- --- -------- O -------------------------- --------------------------------

0.3 ---- -----1.0 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------1.0

02 Exhaust Manifold

 Manifold Assembly ------------------------ O ------- ------- ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ O

0.3 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------3.0

 Gaskets ---------------------------------------- O ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------ O

0.1 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------0.5

 Hoses------------------------------------------- C ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------ O

0.2 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------1.0

 Studs, Washers and Nuts --------------- O ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------ O

0.2 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------1.0

03 Filter Assembly Oil

 Filter Assembly ----------------------------- O ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------ O

0.2 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------0.5

 By-Pass Valve ------------------------------- C ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------ O

0.2 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------0.5

 Filter Elements & Gaskets--------------- C ----- ------C ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ O ----- ------- -------- ----- ----- ------------------------

0.2 ---- ----- 03----- ------- ------ ------- ------0.5

04 Oil Filter, Dipstick and Breather -------- C ----- ------C ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ O ----- ------- -------- ----- ----- ------------------------

0.2 ---- -----0.5 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------0.2

 Cap, Gage and Gaskets ------------------ O ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------ O

0.1 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------0.2

05 Oil Cooler (Engine)

 Core & Plate Assembly------------------- O ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------ O

0.2 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------1.5

 Gaskets, Hoses ----------------------------- C ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- -------0

0.2 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------1.0

 By-Pass Valve ------------------------------- O ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------ O

0.1 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------0.5

06 Fuel Filter Assembly ------------------------ C ----- ------C ----- ------- ------ ------- -------C

 Filter Assembly ----------------------------- 0.1 ---- -----0.2 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------0.2 Filter Element-------------------------------- ------ ------C ----- ------- ------ ------- -------C

------ -----0.2 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------0.2

 Gaskets and Packing --------------------- C ----- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- -------C

0.1 ---- ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------0.2

C-3
TM 55-1905-217-12

(1) (2) (3) (4) 

GROUP MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS TOOLS AND 

NUMBER FUNCTIONAL GROUP A B C D E F G H I J K EQUIPMENT

07 Fuel strainer (Eng Mtg) C------- ------ C------- ------- -------- ------- -------- O

 Filter Assembly-------------------------------------- 0.1------ ----- 0.2------ ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.2 Filter Element (Knife Type)------------------------ -------- ------ C------- ------- -------- ------- -------- C

-------- ----- 0.2------ ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.2

 Gaskets and Seals ---------------------------------- C------- ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- -------- C

0.1------ ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.2

08 Fuel Strainer (Line)

 Filter Assembly--------------------------------------- C------- ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ---------0

0.1------ ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.2

 Filter Element(Knife-Type) ------------------------ -------- ------ C------- ------- -------- ------- -------- C

-------- ----- 0.2------ ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.2

 Gaskets and Seals ---------------------------------- C------- ------ C------- ------- -------- ------- -------- C

0.1------ ----- 0.2------ ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.2

09 Fuel Piping

 Fitting, Seals & Sleeves, Tanks C------- ------ C------- ------- -------- ------- -------- O ------ ------------------ ------ ----- 1 

and Tubes ----------------------------------------- 0.5------ ----- 0.1------ ------- -------- ------- ------- 8.0

10 Fuel Pump

 Pump Assembly--------------------------------------O------- ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- -------- O F ------- H ----- ----- 2

0.1------ ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.5 3.5 ------ 4.0

 Bearings and Shaft --------------------------------- F ------- ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ---------F

0.1------ ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ------- 1.5

 Gaskets and Seals ----------------------------------O------- ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- -------- O ------ ------------------ ------ ----- 

0.1------ ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.4

 Valve Relief-------------------------------------------- F ------- ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ---------F

0.1------ ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.2

11 Rocker Arm Cover

 Cover ---------------------------------------------------- 0 ------- ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ---------0

0.2------ ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.3

 Gaskets and Seals ---------------------------------- 0 ------- ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ---------0

0.2------ ------- -------- ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.4

 Fuel Injectors -----------------------------------------O F O O ------ -------- ------- -------- O ----- F ------- H -----3-4-5-6-7 

0.1 0.3 0.4 0.2 ----- -------- ------- ------- 0.1 ---2.5 ------ 6.0

Tip Assembly-------------------------------------- F ------- ------ F ------- ------- -------- ------- ---------F ---------- ------ ----- 8

0.1------ ----- 0.4------ ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.2

Filter ------------------------------------------------------- C------- ------ C------- ------- -------- ------- -------- C

0.1------ ----- 0.1------ ------- -------- ------- ------- 0.1

C-4
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-5
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-6
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-7
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-8
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-9
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-10
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-11
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-12
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-13
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-14
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-15
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-16
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-17
TM 55-1905-217-12

C-18
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION III. SPECIAL TOOL AND SPECIAL TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

Reference Maintenance Nomenclature Tool

Code Category Number

1H 0 Wrench: Fuel Line Fittings J8932-1

(33287)

8C F Repair Kit: Injector Service J1241-06

(3287)

4C F Tool Set: Injector Tube Service J5286-01

(33287)

5H O Remover: Injector and Spring Compressor J1227-01

(33287)

6C F Fixture: Injector Assembly J6868-01

(39287)

7D O Gage: Injector Timing 1.460 (HV7) J1853

(33287)

8C F Wire: Spray Tip Cleaner .006 in (HV7) J21461

(33287)

9I F Remover: Coupling, Fresh Water Pump 011 Seal J1980

(33287)

IOH 0 Wrench: Fuel and Water Pump J4242

(33287)

11K H Installer: Governor Bearing J21068

(33287)

12H F Gage: Gap, Governor Spring, 0.170 in J5407

(33287)

13I H Tool Set: Blower Service J6270-02

(88287)

14I H Adapter Set: Slide Hammer J6471-02

(33287)

15I H Installer: Blower Drive Cam J1471

(33287)

16D H Gage: Feeler, Blower Clearance J1698-02

(33287)

17I H Tool Kit: Service, Marine Hydraulic 0il Pump J6904

(33287)

18I F Installer: Oil Pump Piston, Hydrostarter J7191

(33287)

19I F Installer: Oil Pump Seal, Hydrostarter J7192

(01843)

20C O Hose Assembly: Accumulator Charging TSE8600

(01843)

21C O Gage Assembly: Accumulator TSE8601

(33287)

22H F Wrench: Coupling Flange Lock Nut J4385-01

(33287)

23H F Wrench: Remover-Replacer, Shaft ,1 Lock Nut J4384-01

(33287)

24H F Puller Set: Slide Hammer, Reverse Gear J65901

(33287)

C-19
TM 55-1905-217-12

Reference Maintenance Nomenclature Tool

Code Category Number

25H F Remover-Replacer: Seal, Reverse Gear J4700

(33287)

28H F Remover-Installer: Reverse Gear Piston, Model M J4746

(33287)

27H F Installer: Oil Seal, Flywheel Housing J9727

(33287)

28H F Expander: Oil Seal, Crankshaft, Rear J1359

(33287)

29H F Installer Handle: Oil Seal, Flywheel Housing J3154-1

(33287)

30H F Puller: Crankshaft Pulley J4558

(33287)

31H F Wrench: Torque, 3/4 in Drive, 0-300 Ft Lb J9187

(33287)

32D O Gage Set: Feeler, Valve Lash J9708

(38287)

33H F Fixture: Cam Follower Pin Remover J5340

(33287)

34H F Wrench, Torque, 1/2" Drive, 0-200 Ft Lb J1264

(33287)

35B F Tester: Spring Valve Compression J9666

(33287)

35H F Compressor: Spring Valve J7455

(33287)

36H H Remover: Valve Guide J267

(33287)

37H H Installer: Valve Guide J9530

(33287)

38H H Brush: Valve Guide Cleaner J5437

(33287)

89H H Remover: Insert, Valve Seat J4824-01

(33287)

40H H Installer: Insert, Valve Seat J1736

(33287)

41H H Grinder Set: Valve Seat J8185

(33287)

42H H Adapter: Puller, Crankshaft Oil Plug J8183

(33287)

43H H Hammer: Slide, Crankshaft Oil Plug Removal J6471-1

(33287)

44H H Puller: Camshaft Gear J1902-01

(33287)

45H H Adapter Plate Set: Camshaft Gear Removal J6202

(33287)

46H F Installer-Remover Set: Piston and Connecting Rod Bushing J1513-02

(33287)

47H F Installer: Piston Pin Retainer J4895-01

(33287)

C-20
TM 55-1905-217-12

Change 7 C-21
TM 55-1905-217-12

SECTION IV. REMARKS

REFERENCE CODE REMARKS

A-C Service is limited to silencer and air passage - keep free of foreign material.

B-C Cleaning of filter assembly induded when changing filters.

C-C Clean breather pipe and silencer air intake area.

D-H Caution: Do not over torque fuel line fittings.

E-C Service of injectors and seat is limited to cleaning and carbon removal.

H-H Replacement of hoses and damps is from keel cooler shut off valve to water 

pump and adjacent areas.

I-H Replace includes exhaust insulation.

J-C Service indudes cleaning of debris.

K-H Replacing governor springs indudes readjustment.

L-C Service of strainer indudes strainer housing.

M-D Caution: Do not parallel regulator - this will damage diodes in alternator.

N-C Service of brushes is cleaning and seating new brushes.

O-C Service indudes charging accumulator with gas (nitrogen).

P-D Engine tune-up is required if any changes are made to valve operating 

mechanism.

Q-H Use torque wrench to draw down cylinder head.

R-H Replacement of front seal only.

S-B Compression test indicates condition of engine.

T-H Replacement of panel gages includes general maintenance of control panel.

U-C Service of miscellaneous electrical items includes cleaning of any corrosion.

V-C Service includes cleaning and lubrication of wire and chain - Hull Nos

8500 - 8519.

W-C Service of batteries includes cleaning of racks and adjacent area.

X-H Replacement of hull wiring includes sections and harness.

Y-A Inspection of steering cylinders includes tightening of rod packing gland.

Z-D Service of packing in stuffing box includes adjustment of glands.

AA-C Service indudes replacement of "DE batteries.

AB-I Minor repair above water line only.

AC-A Inspection of gaskets includes cleaning with wooden stick cut off square.

AD-I Repair includes patching rips and tears.

AE-H Applicable to Hull Nos. 8500 - 8539.

*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE;: 1995-388-421/42041

PIN: 012445-007

C-22 Change 7
TM 55-1905-217-12

INDEX

Paragraphs Page

A

Accumulator ................................................................................................................................ 4-80 4-55

Administrative storage................................................................................................................. 1-6 1-1

Air silencer................................................................................................................................... 4-36 4-35

Alternators ................................................................................................................................... 4-48 4-43

Alternators and belt adjustment................................................................................................... 3-11 3-11

B

Batteries 3-14 .............................................................................................................................. 3-11

Bilge pumping system ................................................................................................................. 2-7 2-35

Bilge pumps................................................................................................................................. 4-101 4-81

Bilge pumps (belt adjustment, removal and installation)............................................................. 3-17 3-11

Bilge pumps, strainers and lines ................................................................................................. 4-102 4-82

Blower.......................................................................................................................................... 4-37 4-35

C

Clutch adjustment (power take-off) ............................................................................................. 4-84 4-72

Communication equipment.......................................................................................................... 2-9, 5-3 2-35, 5-1

Controls and instruments ............................................................................................................ 2-2 2-1

D

Description (end item) ................................................................................................................. 1-7 1-1

Destruction of army material to prevent enemy use.................................................................... 1-5 1-1

Differences in models.................................................................................................................. 1-8 1-2

Dismantling for movement .......................................................................................................... 4-4 4-1

E

Electric starting motor.................................................................................................................. 4-50 4-51

Emergency clutch engagement................................................................................................... 4-69 4-60

Engine compression test ............................................................................................................. 4-20 4-14

Engine mounted fuel strainers and filters .................................................................................... 4-27 4-18

Engine oil cooler.......................................................................................................................... 4-25 4-18

Engine oil filter............................................................................................................................. 4-24 4-18

Engines (description)................................................................................................................... 4-19 4-18

Engine throttle controls................................................................................................................ 4-32 4-28

Engine water manifold................................................................................................................. 4-43 4-40

Equipment serviceability criteria.................................................................................................. 1-4 1-1

Exhaust manifold......................................................................................................................... 4-22 4-16

Exhaust valve clearance adjustment........................................................................................... 4-21 4-15

F

Field expedient repairs:

Broken drive belts ................................................................................................................. 3-27 3-19

Emergency clutch engagement ............................................................................................ 3-28 3-19

Engine heats up.................................................................................................................... 3-24 3-18

Loss of electrical power ........................................................................................................ 3-26 3-18

Loss of fuel............................................................................................................................ 3-23 3-18

Loss of lubricating oil ............................................................................................................ 3-25 3-18

Fire extinguishers ........................................................................................................................ 2-8, 5-1 2-35, 5-1

Fresh water pump ....................................................................................................................... 4-45 4-40

Fuel injectors ............................................................................................................................... 4-28 4-19

Fuel line strainers (hull numbers 8500 thru 8519)....................................................................... 3-8 3-10

I-1
TM 55-1905-217-12

Paragraph Page

Fuel line strainers (hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618).................................3-9 3-10

Fuel pump .............................................................................................................................4-29 4-22

Fuel strainer and fuel filters (engine mounted)......................................................................3-10 3-10

Fuses.....................................................................................................................................3-12 3-11

G

Governor................................................................................................................................4-30 4-22

Governor and injector rack control adjustments....................................................................4-31 4-26

H

Hand pump (hydraulic starting system).................................................................................4-62 4-58

Heat exchanger (keel cooler) lines and connections.............................................................4-42 4-40

Helm unit and steering wheel ................................................................................................4-82 4-69

Hull:

General ...........................................................................................................................4-104 4-86

Inspection and repair ......................................................................................................4-101 4-81

Painting...........................................................................................................................4-102 4-82

Hydraulic filter........................................................................................................................4-59 4-55

Hydraulic pumps (engine driven)...........................................................................................4-61 4-57

Hydraulic ramp hoist system (filling)......................................................................................4-86 4-74

Hydraulic starting control valve:

Hull numbers 8520 thru 8539..........................................................................................4-65 4-59

Hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618)........................................................4-66 4-60

Hydraulic starting motors.......................................................................................................4-63 4-58

Hydraulic starting system (filling)_.........................................................................................4-58 4-55

Hydraulic steering system (filling)..........................................................................................4-76 4-65

Hydraulic steering system filter..............................................................................................3-14 3-11

I

Inspecting and servicing the equipment................................................................................4-2 4-1

Instruments and gages.......................................................................................................... 4-52 4-52

L

Lights (navigational and utility) .............................................................................................. 4-55 4-52

Lubrication information (detailed)..........................................................................................3-2 3-1

Lubrication information (general)...........................................................................................3-1 3-1

Lubrication information (organizational) ................................................................................4-40 4-36

M

Maintenance forms and records............................................................................................1-2 1-1

Maintenance repair parts ...................................................................................................... 4-8 4-6

Mufflers..................................................................................................................................4-40 4-36

N

Navigational equipment (hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618) .......................2-10, 5-4 2-35, 5-1

0

Operation in cold weather...................................................................................................... 2-10, 5-4 2-35, 5-1

Operation in foul weather ...................................................................................................... 2-13 2-37

Operation in hot weather ....................................................................................................... 2-12 2-37

Operation of landing craft ......................................................................................................2-5 2-15

Operation of ramp hoist.........................................................................................................2-6 2-15

P

Pilot house engine control system (hull numbers 8500 thru 8519) ....................................... 4-34

4-33

Pilot house engine control system (hull numbers 8520 thru 8539) 4-35 ...............................4-38

Power transfer assembly service ..........................................................................................4-74 4-65

Preventive maintenance checks and services procedure (crew) ..........................................3-4 3-6

Preventive maintenance checks and services procedure (organizational) 4-12 ...................4-8

Propeller ...............................................................................................................................3-20 3-12

Propeller shaft, strut bearing, and rudder gudgeon bearing..................................................3-21 3-12

Propulsion unit controls (hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618)........................4-33 4-31

I-2
TM 55-1905-217-12

Paragraphs Page

R

Radio interference suppression components..........................................................................4-16 4-13

Methods used to attain...................................................................................................._4-15 4-13

Component replacement ..................................................................................................4-17 4-13

Component testing............................................................................................................4-18 4-13

Ramp hoist control valve .........................................................................................................4-89 4-75

Ramp hoist system counterbalance valve (hull numbers 8520 thru 8539) .............................4-94 4-78

Ramp hoist system counterbalance valve (hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8818).................................................................................................................................4-94 4-78

Ramp hoist hand ’pump (hull numbers 8520 thru 8539) .........................................................4-96 4-78

Ramp hoist hydraulic system filter...........................................................................................3-15 3-11

Ramp hoist system filters and strainers ..................................................................................4-87 4-75

Ramp hoist system pumps ......................................................................................................4-88 4-75

Ramp hoist system relief valve (hull numbers 8500 thru 8519) ..............................................4-93 4-77

Ramp hoist hydraulic system strainer (hull numbers 8500 thru 8519)....................................3-16 3-11

Ramp locking cylinder (hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618)............................4-97 4-79

Ramp selector valve (hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618) ..............................4-98 4-79

Raw (sea) water pump ............................................................................................................4-46 4-40

Reinstallation after movement.................................................................................................4-5 4-1

Relief valve..............................................................................................................................4-67 4-60

Reporting of errors ..................................................................................................................1-3 1-1

Rudder angle indicator (hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru 8618)...........................4-56 4-54

S

Scope ......................................................................................................................................1-1 1-1

Sea water strainer ...................................................................................................................3-6 3-12

Service of used equipment......................................................................................................4-3 4-1

Solenoid valve (hull numbers 8500 thru 8519)........................................................................4-64 4-59

Special tools and equipment ...................................................................................................4-7 4-4

Starting ....................................................................................................................................2-3 2-14

Starting aid ..............................................................................................................................4-38 4-36

Steering cylinders....................................................................................................................4-79 4-68

Steering system filters and strainers .......................................................................................4-77 4-67

Steering system pumps...........................................................................................................4-78 4-67

Steering system valve adjustments:

Hull numbers 8500 thru 8519............................................................................................4-80 4-68

Hull numbers 8520 thru 8560 and 8.580 thru 8618 ..........................................................4-81 4-69

Stopping the engines...............................................................................................................2-4 2-14

Storage batteries, cables and terminals ..................................................................................4-51 4-52

Stuffing box .............................................................................................................................3-19 3-12

T

Tabulated data.........................................................................................................................1-9 1-3

Tachometers and drives..........................................................................................................4-53 4-52

Thermostat and housing..........................................................................................................4-44 4-40

Tools and equipment...............................................................................................................4-6 4-4

Transmission control valve......................................................................................................4-71 4-63

Transmission oil cooler ...........................................................................................................4-72 4-63

Transmission oil pump ............................................................................................................4-70 4-61

Troubleshooting (crew)............................................................................................................3-6 3-8

Troubleshooting (organizational).............................................................................................4-14 4-9

V

Voltage regulators ...................................................................................................................4-49 4-51

W

Warning lights and sending units a .........................................................................................4-54 4-52

Winch automatic reversing mechanism (hull numbers 8540 thru 8560 and 8580 thru

8618).................................................................................................................................4-99 4-79

Winch brake valve (hull numbers 8500 thru 8519)..................................................................4-95 4-78

Winch:

Hull numbers 8500 thru 8519............................................................................................4-90 4-76

Hull numbers 85’20 thru 85394-91....................................................................................4-76

I-3
TM 55-1905-217-12

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

FREDERICK C. WEYAND

General, United States Army,

Chief of Staff

Official:

VERNE L. BOWERS

Major General, United-State8 Army,

The Adjutant GeneraL

Distribution:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25D (qty rqr block no. 813), Operator requirements for Marine

Equipment: ALL.

*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1986-491-421/40186

PIN: 012445-00